Asus DSAN-DX User Manual
Motherboard DSAN-DX
ii E3635 First Edition V1 February 2008 Copyright © 2007 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this ma nual, including the products and soft ware described in i t, may be reproduc ed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (âASUSâ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiîed or altered, unless such rep air , mod iîcation of a lteration i s authorized in writi ng by ASU S; or (2) the ser ial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROV IDES THIS MANUAL âAS ISâ WITHOU T WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EI THER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DI RE C TOR S, O FF IC ER S , E MP L OY EE S O R A G EN TS B E L I AB LE F OR A NY IN DI RE C T , S PE CI AL , INC IDENTAL, OR CON SEQU ENTIA L D AMAGE S ( INCL UDIN G D AMAGE S F OR LOS S O F P ROFI TS, LO SS O F B US IN ES S, L OSS O F US E OR D A TA, IN TE RRU PT IO N O F BU SI NE SS AN D T HE L IK E), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . S P E C I F I C AT I O N S A N D I N F O R M AT I O N C O N TA I N E D I N T H I S M A N U A L A R E F U R N I S H E D F O R INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A C OMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY O R L I AB I L I T Y F O R A N Y E R R O R S O R I N AC C U R A C I E S T H AT M AY A P P E A R I N T H I S M A N U A L , INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Prod ucts and c orporat e n ames app earing i n t his manu al may or ma y n ot be regi stered t rademar ks or copyrights o f the ir re spective companie s, an d are u sed only for identiî cation or explanati on an d to t he ownersâ beneît, without intent to infringe.
iii Contents Notices ........................................................................................................ vii Safety information .................................................................................... viii About this guide ......................................................................................... ix T ypography .................................................................................................. x DSAN-DX speciîcations summary ........................................................... xi Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 Welcome! ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ......................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Serial number label ...................................................................... 1-2 1.4 Special features ............................................................................ 1-2 1.4.1 Product highlights ........................................................... 1-2 1.4.2 Innovative ASUS features ............................................... 1-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.1 Before you proceed ..................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-3 2.2.1 Placement direction ........................................................ 2-3 2.2.2 Screw holes .................................................................... 2-3 2.2.3 Support kits for the motherboard .................................... 2-4 2.2.4 Motherboard layouts ....................................................... 2-7 2.2.5 Layout contents ............................................................... 2-8 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................. 2-10 2.3.1 Installing the CPU ......................................................... 2-10 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan .............................. 2-13 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-15 2.4.1 Overview ....................................................................... 2-15 2.4.2 Memory conîgurations .................................................. 2-15 2.4.3 Memory sparing technology .......................................... 2-17 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM .......................................................... 2-19 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ........................................................ 2-19 2.5 Expansion slots .......................................................................... 2-20 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card ......................................... 2-20 2.5.2 Conîguring an expansion card ..................................... 2-20 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments ................................................... 2-21
iv Contents 2.5.4 PCI Express x16 slot (x16 link) ..................................... 2-22 2.5.5 PCI Express x8 slots (x8 link; x4 link) ........................... 2-22 2.5.6 PCI slot ......................................................................... 2-22 2.5.8 SODIMM socket ........................................................... 2-22 2.5.9 Installing ASUS PIKE RAID card .................................. 2-23 2.5.10 Installing i Button ........................................................... 2-23 2.6 Jumpers ...................................................................................... 2-24 2.7 Connectors ................................................................................. 2-29 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .................................................. 2-29 2.7.2 Internal connectors ....................................................... 2-30 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.1 Starting up for the îrst time ........................................................ 3-1 3.2 T urning off the computer ............................................................. 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function .................................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch .............................. 3-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 4-1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable îoppy disk ....................................... 4-1 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility ................................................................ 4-2 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility ...................................... 4-5 4.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................... 4-6 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen .......................................................... 4-7 4.2.2 Menu bar ......................................................................... 4-7 4.2.3 Navigation keys ............................................................... 4-7 4.2.4 Menu items ..................................................................... 4-8 4.2.5 Sub-menu items .............................................................. 4-8 4.2.6 Conîguration îelds ......................................................... 4-8 4.2.7 Pop-up window ............................................................... 4-8 4.2.8 Scroll bar ......................................................................... 4-8 4.2.9 General help ................................................................... 4-8 4.3 Main menu .................................................................................... 4-9 4.3.1 System T ime [xx:xx:xx] ................................................... 4-9 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] ......................................... 4-9
v Contents 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44 MB 3.5 in.] ................................ 4-9 4.3.4 SA T A1â6; P A T A Master/Slave ....................................... 4-10 4.3.5 IDE Conîguration .......................................................... 4-12 4.3.6 System Information ....................................................... 4-13 4.4 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 4-13 4.4.1 USB Conîguration ........................................................ 4-14 4.4.2 CPU Conîguration ........................................................ 4-15 4.4.3 Chipset .......................................................................... 4-17 4.4.4 Onboard Device Conîguration ...................................... 4-19 4.4.5 PCIPnP ......................................................................... 4-20 4.5 Server menu ............................................................................... 4-21 4.5.1 ASF Support [Enabled] ................................................. 4-21 4.5.2 Remote Access Conîguration ....................................... 4-21 4.6 Power menu ................................................................................ 4-23 4.6.1 ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] ......................................... 4-23 4.6.2 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ....................................... 4-23 4.7 Boot menu .................................................................................. 4-27 4.7.1 Boot Device Priority ...................................................... 4-27 4.7.2 Boot Settings Conîguration .......................................... 4-28 4.7.3 Security ......................................................................... 4-29 4.8 Exit menu .................................................................................... 4-31 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.1 Setting up RAID ............................................................................ 5-1 5.1.1 RAID deînitions .............................................................. 5-1 5.1.2 Installing hard disk drives ................................................ 5-2 5.1.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS ........................................ 5-2 5.1.4 RAID conîguration utilities .............................................. 5-2 5.2 LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility .................................... 5-3 5.2.1 Creating a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set .................................... 5-4 5.2.2 Creating a RAID 10 set ................................................. 5-10 5.2.3 Adding or viewing a RAID conîguration ....................... 5-14 5.2.4 Initializing the logical drives .......................................... 5-17 5.2.5 Rebuilding failed drives ................................................. 5-22 5.2.6 Checking the drives for data consistency ..................... 5-24
vi Contents 5.2.7 Deleting a RAID conîguration ....................................... 5-27 5.2.8 Selecting the boot drive from a RAID set ...................... 5-28 5.2.9 Enabling the WriteCache .............................................. 5-29 5.3 Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility ................. 5-30 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) ...................................... 5-31 5.3.2 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) ...................................... 5-33 5.3.3 Creating a RAID 10 set (Stripe Mirror) ....................... 5-34 5.3.4 Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) ...................................... 5-35 5.3.5 Deleting a RAID set ...................................................... 5-36 5.3.6 Resetting disks to Non-RAID ........................................ 5-37 5.3.7 Exiting the Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager .................... 5-37 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.1 RAID driver installation ............................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk ............................................ 6-1 6.1.2 Installing the RAID controller driver ................................ 6-4 6.2 Intel ® chipset device installation .............................................. 6-10 6.3 LAN driver installation ............................................................... 6-13 6.4 VGA driver installation............................................................... 6-16 6.4.1 Windows ® Server 2003 ................................................. 6-16 6.5 Management applications and utilities installation ................ 6-18 6.5.1 Running the support CD ............................................... 6-18 6.5.2 Drivers menu ................................................................. 6-18 6.5.3 Management Software menu ........................................ 6-19 6.5.4 Utilities menu ................................................................ 6-19 6.5.5 Contact information ....................................................... 6-19 Appendix: Reference information A.1 DSAN-DX model block diagram .................................................. A-1
vii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerâ s instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiîcations to this unit not expressly appro ved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userâs authority to operate this equipment.
viii Safety information Electrical safety ⢠T o prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adapter or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company . ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to îx it by yourself. Contact a qualiîed service technician or your retailer . Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately . ⢠T o avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry . ⢠A void dust, humidity , and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualiîed service technician or your retailer . This symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product (electrical, electronic equipment, and mercury-containing button cell battery) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products.
ix About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and conîguring the motherboard. How this guide is organized This user guide contains the following parts: ⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technologies it supports. ⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠Chapter 3: Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠Chapter 4: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠Chapter 5: RAID conîguration This chapter provides instructions for setting up, creating, and conîguring RAID sets using the available utilities. ⢠Chapter 6: Driver installation This chapter provides instructions for installing the necessary drivers for different system components. ⢠Appendix: Reference information This appendix includes additional information that you may refer to when conîguring the motherboard. Where to înd more information Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1. ASUS websites The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2. Optional documentation Y our product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty îyers, that may have been added by your dealer . These documents are not part of the standard package.
x Conventions used in this guide T o make sure that you perform certain tasks properly , take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. Typography Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater- than sign means that you must press the enclosed key . Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key . <Key1 Key2 Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously , the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl Alt D> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: format A:/S DANGER/W ARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: T ips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORT ANT : Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.
xi DSAN-DX speciî¿cations summary Model Name DSAN-DX Processor / System Bus 2 * Socket LGA771 Quad-Core Intel ® Xeon ® 5400 Series (45nm) Dual-Core Intel ® Xeon ® 5200 Series (45nm) Quad-Core Intel ® Xeon ® 5300 Series Dual-Core Intel ® Xeon ® 5000/5100 Series Dual Core/Quad Core FSB 667/1066/1333 Core Logic Intel ® 5100 Memory Controller Hub (MCH) Intel ® ICH9R Form Factor SSI CEB 1.1 Compliant, 12"x10.5" ASUS Features Smart Fan Smart Fan II Rack Ready (Rack and Pedestal dual use) � ASWM2.0 � PIKE � Flex-E � Memory T otal Slots 6 (2-channel; dual ranks per slot) Capacity Maximum up to 48 GB Memory T ype DDR2 533/667 Reg. ECC Memory Size 512 MB, 1 GB, 2GB, 4GB, 8GB** Expansion Slots (follow SSI Loacation #) T otal PCI/PCI-X/ PCI-E Slots 5 Slot Loacation 1 1 * PCI-E x8 (x4 Link) ( Auto disable if PIKE slot is occupied ) Slot Loacation 3 1 * PCI 32bit/33 MHz Slot Loacation 4 1 * PCI-E x8 ( X8 Link) Slot Loacation 5 1 * PCI-E x8 ( X8 Link) Slot Loacation 6 1 * PCI-E x16 ( x16 Link) (Auto switch to x8 Link if slot 5 is occupied ) Additional Slot 1 1* SO-DIMM socke t for optional ASMB3-SOL Additional Slot 2 1* PIKE Slot for Stroage expansion Storage IDE Controller IT8213F-L Single Channel Bus Master IDE support UltraA T A 33/66/100 SA T A Controller Intel ® ICH9R: 6 SA T A2 300MB/s ports Intel Matrix Storage (for Windows only) (Support software RAID 0, 1, 10 & 5) LSI ® MegaRAID (for Linux/Windows) (Support software RAID 0, 1, 10) Networking LAN 2 * Broadcom ® BCM5721 PCI-E GbE LAN Graphic VGA XGI Z9s PCI Display Controller 32MB ** The 8GB memory modules are not tested yet
xii DSAN-DX speciî¿cations summary *Speciîcations are subject to change without notice. Onboard I/O Connectors Floppy Connector 1 PSU Connector 24-pin A TX power connector 8-pin A TX 12V power connector Management Connector SO-DIMM socket for ASMB3 USB Connectors 2 (support 4 USB ports) (Blue) Fan Header 8 * 4Pin (With PWM control) SMBus 2 Chassis Intruder 1 Front LAN LED 2 Serial Port Header 1 SGPIO connector 3 Rear I/O Connectors External Serial Port 1 External USB Port 2 VGA Port 1 RJ-45 2 PS/2 KB/Mouse 1 Management Solution Software ASWM2.0 Out of Band Remote Management Optional (ASMB3-SOL / ASMB3-iKVM) Monitoring CPU T emperature � F AN RPM � Environment Operation temperature: 10â ~ 35â Non operation temperature: -40â ~ 70â Non operation humidity: 20% ~ 90% ( Non condensing) ⢠LSI ® MegaRAID 5 function is available only when you install ASUS PIKE 1078 RAID card with iBTN. ⢠The onboard IDE connector is designed for ODD only (P A T A).
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
ASUS DSAN-DX Chapter summary 1 1.1 Welcome! ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ......................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Serial number label ...................................................................... 1-2 1.4 Special features ............................................................................ 1-2
ASUS DSAN-DX 1-1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS ® DSAN-DX motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below . 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer . Standard Gift Box Pack Standard Bulk Pack DSAN-DX DSAN-DX Cables SA T A signal cable 6 -- SA T A power cable 3 -- 2-in-1 cable set (IDE FDD cable) 1 -- Accessories IO shield 1 1 CEK spring 2 -- Application CD Support CD 1 1 Documentation User Guide 1 1 Packing Qty . 3pcs per carton 10pcs per carton
1-2 Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.4 Special features 1.4.1 Product highlights Latest processor technology The motherboard comes with two LGA-771 sockets that support Quad/Dual-Core Intel ® Xeon⢠processors with 1333/1066/667 MHz Front Side Bus (FSB). Quad/ Dual-core processors contain four/two physical CPU cores to meet demands for more powerful processing. Intel ® Xeon⢠processors incorporate the Intel ® Hyper-Threading T echnology and Extended Memory 64-bit T echnology (EM64T). The EM64T enables the support for 64-bit operation system, such as 64-bit Windows ® and Linux. Intel ® 5100MCH and Intel ® ICH9R chipset The Intel ® 5100 Memory Controller Hub (MCH) and the Intel ® ICH9R provide the vital interfaces for the motherboard. The MCH provides the processor , dual-channel DDR2 DIMM memory support, and PCI Express interfaces. The Intel ® ICH9R is an I/O controller hub that provides the interface for PCI 2.3, and PCI Express. Intel ® EM64T The motherboard supports Intel ® processors with the Intel ® EM64T (Extended Memory 64 T echnology). The Intel ® EM64T feature allows your computer to run on 64-bit operating systems and access larger amounts of system memory for faster and more efîcient computing. Enhanced Intel SpeedStep ® T echnology (EIST) The Enhanced Intel SpeedStep ® T echnology (EIST) intelligently manages the CPU resources by automatically adjusting the CPU voltage and core frequency depending on the CPU loading and system speed or power requirement. 1.3 Serial number label Before requesting support from the ASUS T echnical Support team, you must take note of the motherboard's serial number containing 12 characters xxM0Axxxxxxx shown as the îgure below . With the correct serial number of the product, ASUS T echnical Support team members can then offer a quicker and satisfying solution to your problems. xxM0Axxxxxxx DSAN-DX Made in China åæ ¼
ASUS DSAN-DX 1-3 PCI Express⢠interface Th e m oth erb oa rd fu lly s up por ts PCI E xp res s, the latest I/O interconnect technology that speeds up the PCI bus. PCI Express features point-to-point serial interconnections between devices and allows higher clockspeeds by carrying data in packets. This high speed interface is software compatible with existing PCI or PCI-X speciîcations. Broadcom 5721 LAN solution The motherboard comes with a dual-port Broadcom 5721 network connection to provide a total solution for your networking needs. Refer to page 2-28 for the location of the LAN ports and section 2.6 Jumpers for details on Gigabit LAN settings. Serial A T A II technology The mothe rboard suppo rts t he Serial ATA II 3 Gb/s technology through ICH9R Serial A T A interfaces. The Serial A T A II speciîcation provides twice the bandwidth of the current Serial A T A products with a host of new features, including Native Command Queuing (NCQ), Power Management (PM) Implementation Algorithm, and Hot Swap. Serial A T A allows thinner , more îexible cables with lower pin count and reduced voltage requirements. USB 2.0 technology The motherboard implements the Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 speciîcation, dramatically increasing the connection speed from the 12 Mbps bandwidth on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. T emperature, fan, and voltage monitoring The CPU temperature is monitored by the W83793G chip to prevent overheating and damage. The system fan rotations per minute (RPM) is monitored for timely failure detection. The chip monitors the voltage levels to ensure stable supply of current for critical components.
1-4 Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.4.2 Innovative ASUS features ASUS Smart Fan II technology The ASUS Smart Fan technology smartly adjusts the fan speeds according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efîcient operation. PIKE (Proprietary I/O Kit Expansion) PIKE is an on-demand upgrade kit for users. This ASUS unique feature enables users to choose their preferred I/O solutions. ASUS provides multiple SAS solutions for different segments and purposes and PIKE saves lots of validation efforts and hardware cost for end users. Moreover , the special patent design offers multiple I/O solutions without occupying the Slot 6 in 1U system. ASUS Flex-E T echnology ASUS Flex-E T echnology allows PCIE slots to automatically switch conîgurations for Graphic Card and Storage Utilization. ASUS Flex-E T echnology of fers two kinds of c onîgur ations , PC I-E x8 Link on b oth Sl ot 5 a nd 6 or PC I-E x1 6 Li nk on the Sl ot 6 . The PCI-E signal of the Slot 6 would switch to x16 Link automatically when the Slot 5 is not occupied. With this îexibility , ASUS Flex-E makes motherboards suitable for both Server and Workstation.
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
ASUS DSAN-DX Chapter summary 2 2.1 Before you proceed ..................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-3 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................. 2-10 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-15 2.5 Expansion slots .......................................................................... 2-20 2.6 Jumpers ...................................................................................... 2-24 2.7 Connectors ................................................................................. 2-29
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-1 2.1 Before you proceed T ake note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity . ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply . Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX Onboard LED SB_PWR ON Standy Power Powered Of f OFF Onboard LED 1. Standby Power LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED. The green LED lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED
2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. CPU W arning LED The red CPU warning LED lights up as a reminder if CPU is not installed or not properly installed in the CPU socket 2. ⢠When installing only one CPU, the CPU has to be installed to CPU2 socket for a better thermal environment. ⢠If the CPU warning LED lights up, the motherboard will not boot. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX CPU warning LED CPU_WARN1 ON CPU2 not present (red) CPU2 present OFF
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-3 DSAN-DX ® 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the conîguration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard îts into it. T o optimize the motherboard features, we highly recommend that you install it in an SSI CEB 1.1 compliant chassis. 2.2.1 Placement direction When installing the motherboard, make sur e that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear p art of the chassis as indicated in the image below . 2.2.2 Screw holes Place seven (7) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. DO NOT overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. Ensure to unplug the chassis power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components! Place this side towards the rear of the chassis
2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2.3 Support kits for the motherboard For additional protection from motherboard breakage due to the weight of the CPU heatsinks, your motherboard pa ckage comes with CEK springs th at you can use as weight support. Install the CEK springs before installing the motherboard. Hook Each CEK spring has four hooks to match the designated holes around the CPU area. We strongly recommend you use SSI CEB 1.1 compliant chassis. Otherwise, the CPU cooler cannot be mounted on the chassis. T o install the CEK spring: 1. Locate the CPU heatsink holes on the motherboard. 2. Position the CEK spring underneath the motherboard, then match the CEK spring hooks to the CPU1 heatsink holes. Heatsink hole Socket for CPU2 Socket for CPU1
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-5 4. Press the lower spring clips inward, then insert to the lower CPU heatsink holes until they snap in place. 5. If you installed a second CPU, repeat steps 2 to 4 to install the CEK spring to the CPU2 heatsink holes. The CEK springs appear as shown when installed. CEK spring screw hole 3. Press the upper spring hooks inward, then insert to the upper CPU heatsink holes until they snap in place.
2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information 6. Before installing the motherboard into the chassis, locate the standoffs that should match the eight (8) CEK spring screw holes. 8. Secure the motherboard with seven (7) screws. Refer to section 2.2.2 Screw holes for illustration. Make sure that the standoffs perfectly match the CEK spring screw holes; otherwise, you can not install the CPU heatsinks properly . Standoffs for CPU1 Standoffs for CPU2 7. Install the motherboard with the external I/O ports toward the chassis rear panel. The CPU sockets should be right on top of their respective standoffs. Socket for CPU2 Socket for CPU1
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-7 2.2.4 Motherboard layouts DSAN-DX model DSAN-DX ® 24.5cm (9.6in) 24.5cm (9.6in) DDR2 DIMM_A3 (64bit, 240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B3 (64bit, 240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64bit, 240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64bit, 240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64bit, 240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64bit, 240-pin module) PCI E 1 HDLED Super I/O IT8213F AMI 8Mb EATX12V1 USB12_L3 KBMS1 USB56 USB34 FLOPPY1 PRI_IDE PANEL1 SGPIO1 SGPIO2 SGPIO3 SAS8 SAS7 SAS6 SAS5 SAS4 SAS3 SAS2 SAS1 AUX_PANEL1 BCM5721 Intel 5100 MCH Intel 82801IR (ICH9R) BCM5721 LAN1 LAN2 Z9s VGA_SW1 LAN_SW2 ASMB3 LAN_SW1 REAR_FAN1 REAR_FAN2 VGA1 COM1 CPU_FAN2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 FRNT_FAN3 FRNT_FAN4 RAID_SEL1 CPU_WARN1 CPUFAN_SEL1 IBTN_SEL1 I_BTN1 COM2 IDE_SW1 CLRTC1 CHAFAN_SEL1 SB_PWR1 BUZZER1 RECOVERY1 PCIE3 PCIE6 PCI4 PCIE2 PIKE1 PIKE2 EATXPWR1 CPU_FAN1 PSUSMB Lithium Cell CMOS Power SATA5 SATA6 SATA3 SATA4 SATA1 SATA2 CPU1 CPU2
2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2.5 Layout contents Slots/Soocket Page 1. CPU sockets 2-10 2. DDR2 DIMM sockets 2-15 3. PCI Express x16 slot (x16 link) 2-22 4. PCI Express x8 slots (x8 link; x4 link) 2-22 5. PCI slot 2-22 6. PIKE slot 2-22 7. SODIMM socket 2-22 Jumpers Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLR TC1) 2-24 2. VGA controller setting (3-pin VGA_SW1) 2-25 3. LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN_SW1, LAN_SW2) 2-25 4. CPU Fan control setting (3-pin CPUF AN_SEL1) 2-26 5. System Fan control setting (3-pin CHAF AN_SEL1) 2-26 6. IDE setting (3-pin IDE_SW1) 2-27 7. Force BIOS recovery setting (3-pin RECOVERY1) 2-27 8. Intel ® ICH9R SA T A port S/W RAID setting (3-pin RAID_SEL1) 2-28 9. iBTN RAID setting (3-pin IBTN_SEL1) 2-28 Rear panel connectors Page 1. PS/2 mouse port (green) 2-29 2. LAN port for iKVM 2-29 3. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 2-29 4. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 2-29 5. Serial (COM1) port 2-29 6. Video Graphics Adapter port 2-29 7. LAN 1 (RJ-45) ports 2-29 8. LAN 2 (RJ-45) ports 2-29
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-9 Internal connectors Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) 2-30 2. Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1, SA T A2, SA T A3, SA T A4, SA T A5, SA T A6) 2-30 3. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1 2-31 4. SAS connectors (7-pin SAS1, SAS2, SAS3, SAS4, SAS5, SAS6, SAS7, SAS8) 2-32 5. Hard disk activity LED connector (4-pin HDLED1) 2-32 6. Serial General P urpose Input/Out put connector (6- 1 pin SGPIO1) 2-33 7. Serial General Purpose Input/Output connectors (6-1 pin SGPIO2/3) 2-33 8. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB34, USB56) 2-34 9. CPU and system fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN1/2, REAR_F AN1/2, FRNT_F AN1/2/3/4) 2-34 10. Serial port connectors (10-1 pin COM2) 2-35 1 1. Power supply SMBus connector (5-pin PSUSMB1) 2-35 12. SSI po wer con nec tor s (2 4-p in AT XPWR 1, 8-pin A TX12V1) 2-36 13. System panel connector (20-1 pin P ANEL1) 2-37 14. Auxiliary panel connector (20-pin AUX_P ANEL1) 2-38
2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.3.1 Installing the CPU T o install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA771 socket designed for the Intel ® Xeon ® Dual/Quad Core processor . ⢠Before installing the CPU, make sure that the socket box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. ⢠When installing only one CPU, the CPU has to be installed to CPU2 socket for a better thermal environment. ⢠Y our boxed Intel ® Xeon ® LGA771 processor package should come with installation instructions for the CPU and heatsink. If the instructions in this section do not match the CPU documentation, follow the latter . ⢠Upon purchase of the motherboard, make sure that the PnP cap is on the socket and the socket contacts are not bent. Contact your retailer immediately if the PnP cap is missing, or if you see any damage to the PnP cap/socket contacts/motherboard components. ASUS will shoulder the cost of repair only if the damage is shipment/transit-related. ⢠Keep the cap after installing the motherboard. ASUS will process Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) requests only if the motherboard comes with the cap on the LGA771 socket. ⢠The product warranty does not cover damage to the socket contacts resulting from incorrect CPU installation/removal, or misplacement/loss/ incorrect removal of the PnP cap. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX CPU LGA771 CPU1 CPU2
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-1 1 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135º angle. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and foreînger to a 100º angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). T o prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU. 5. Position the CPU over the soc ket, making s ure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket. The socket alignment key should ît into the CPU notch. Alignment key Gold triangle mark Load plate A B 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. Retention tab Load lever This side of the socket box should face you. PnP cap A B
2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information Notes on Intel ® Hyper-Threading T echnology ⢠This motherboard supports Intel ® Xeon⢠CPUs in the 771-land package with Hyper-Threading T echnology . ⢠Hyper-Threading T echnology is supported by Intel ® 5000 series CPU only . 5100/5200/5300/5400 series DO NOT support Hyper-Threading. ⢠The amount of CPU threads depends on the OS support. ⢠Hyper-Threading T echnology is supported under Windows ® XP/2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only . Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠In sta llin g W ind ows ® 2003 Server or later version is recommended. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading T echnology , visit Intel ® website ( www .intel.com/info/hyperthreading ). T o use the Hyper-Threading T echnology on this motherboard: 1. Install an Intel ® Xeon⢠CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup (see Chapter 4: BIOS setup). Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading T echnology is set to Enabled. The item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . 3. Reboot the computer . The CPU îts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. A B
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-13 The Intel ® Xeon⢠processors require an Intel certiîed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. When you buy a boxed Intel C PU, the package includes the heatsink, fan, retention brackets, screws, thermal grease, installation manual, and other items that are necessary for CPU installation. 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan ⢠Ensure that you have applied the thermal grease to the top of the CPU before installing the heatsink and fan. ⢠Refer to the installation manual that came with the CPU package for details on heatsink/fan assembly and installation. CPU heatsink (top view) CPU heatsink (bottom view) Heatsink screw T o install the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four screws on the heatsink align with the nuts on the support plate.
2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to install the other heatsink if you have installed a second CPU, then connect the fan cable to the 4-pin connector labeled CPU_F AN1. 2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the four heatsink screws in a diagonal sequence. DO NOT forget to connect the CPU fan cable! Hardware monitoring errors may occur if you fail to plug this connector . 3. Connect the fan cable to the 4-pin connector labeled CPU_F AN2. CPU_F AN2 connector
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-15 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 Overview The motherboard comes with six (6) Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR2 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR DIMM but has a 240-pin footprint compared to the 184-pin DDR DIMM. The îgure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: 2.4.2 Memory conîgurations Y ou may install 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8GB registered ECC DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠For optimum compatibility , we recommend that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor . Refer to the Qualiîed V endors List on the ASUS web site. ⢠The 8GB memory modules are not tested yet. DSAN-DX ® 128 pins 1 12 pins DIMM_B1 DIMM_A1 DIMM_B3 DIMM_A3 DIMM_B2 DIMM_A2 DSAN-DX 240-pin DDR2 DIMM sockets
2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information Rank population DIMM installation reference table ⢠DIMMs in pair means two DIMMs with the same conîguration. ⢠For better performance, same conîguration DIMMs should be installed on the same slot number for each channel. For example, you may install the same type of DIMMs in DIMM_B1, and DIMM_A1. No. of DIMMs Slot/s to use 1 DIMM_B1 or DIMM_A1 2 DIMM_B1, DIMM_A1 4 DIMM_B1, DIMM_A1, DIMM_B2, DIMM_A2 6 DIMM_B1, DIMM_A1, DIMM_B2, DIMM_A2 DIMM_B3, DIMM_A3 DIMM_B1 DIMM_A1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_A2 DIMM_B3 DIMM_A3 MCH
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-17 2.4.3 Memory sparing technology The Intel ® 5100MCH chipset supports the memory paring technology . Refer to the below sections: ⢠Each channel contains its own sparing engine and can be enabled or disabled separately . ⢠This motherboard does not support rank sparing across channels. ⢠The DIMM rank with the largest size will be assigned as spare rank. Data can only be copied from a smaller sized rank to a larger sized one. ⢠A DIMM can contain only one or two ranks. T o support sparing function, a DIMM channel should contain at least two ranks. ⢠When sparing function is enabled, the usable memory size will reduce the size of the spare ranks. Memory Sparing At conîguration time, a DIMM rank is set aside to replace a defective DIMM rank. When the error rate for a failing DIMM rank reaches a pre-determined threshold, the memory sparing function will issue an interrupt and initiate a spare copy . At the completion of the copy , the failing DIMM rank is disabled and the âsparedâ DIMM rank will be used in its place. Refer to section 4.4.2 Chipset and conîgure the options of Channel Rank Sparing or Channel 1 Rank Sparing to enable the memory sparing functions. The default BIOS setting is disabled. The following tables show memory conîgurations with Memory Sparing function in Channel A/B. One DIMM per channel (two ranks) Channel B Channel A DIMM_B1 (1024MB*2 Ranks) DIMM_A1 (1024MB*2 Ranks) Rank 0 (1024 MB) Rank 1 (1024 MB) Rank 0 (1024 MB) Rank 1 (1024 MB) Sparing Memory space 1024 MB 1024 MB T otal Memory 2048 MB
2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information T wo DIMMs per channel Three DIMMs per channel Channel B Channel A DIMM_B1 (512MB*2 Ranks) DIMM_A1 (512MB*2 Ranks) Rank 0 (512 MB) Rank 1 (512 MB) Rank 0 (512 MB) Rank 1 (512 MB) Sparing Memory space 1024 MB 1024 MB DIMM_B2 (1024MB*2 Ranks) DIMM_A2 (1024MB*2 Ranks) Rank 0 (1024 MB) Rank 1 (1024 MB) Rank 0 (1024 MB) Rank 1 (1024 MB) Sparing Memory space 1024 MB 1024 MB T otal Memory 4096 MB Channel B Channel A DIMM_B1 (512MB*2 Ranks) DIMM_B1 (512MB*2 Ranks) Rank 0 (512 MB) Rank 1 (512 MB) Rank 0 (512 MB) Rank 1 (512 MB) Sparing Memory space 1024 MB 1024 MB DIMM_B2 (1024MB*2 Ranks) DIMM_A2 (1024MB*2 Ranks) Rank 0 (1024 MB) Rank 1 (1024 MB) Rank 0 (1024 MB) Rank 1 (1024 MB) Sparing Memory space 2048 MB 2048 MB DIMM_B3 (2048MB*2 Ranks) DIMM_A3 (2048MB*2 Ranks) Rank 0 (2048 MB) Rank 1 (2048 MB) Rank 0 (2048 MB) Rank 1 (2048 MB) Sparing Memory space 2048 MB 2048 MB T otal Memory 10240 MB
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-19 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. T o install a DIMM: 1. Unlo ck a DIM M so cket by pres sing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM T o remove a DIMM: 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it îts in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. Do not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Unlocked retaining clip DDR2 DIMM notch Support the DIMM lightly with your îngers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it îips out with extra force. DDR2 DIMM notch 1 2 3 1 2 1 1
2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card T o install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press îrmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier . 6. Replace the system cover . 2.5.2 Conîguring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, conîgure the it by adjusting the software settings. 1. T urn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any . See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components.
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-21 * These IRQs are usually available for ISA or PCI devices. 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments Standard Interrupt assignments IRQ Priority Standard function 0 1 System T imer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 - Programmable Interrupt 3* 1 1 Communications Port (COM2) 4* 12 Communications Port (COM1) 5* 13 -- 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7* 15 -- 8 3 System CMOS/Real T ime Clock 9* 4 ACPI Mode when used 10* 5 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering 1 1* 6 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering 12* 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14* 9 Primary IDE Channel 15* 10 Secondary IDE Channel
2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5.8 SODIMM socket The SODIMM socket on the motherboard supports an ASUS ® Server Management Board 3 Series (ASMB3). SODIMM socket 2.5.4 PCI Express x16 slot (x16 link) The onboard PCI Express x16 slots provides x16 link to the 5100 MCH. This slot supports VGA cards and various server class high performance add-on cards. The slot switches to x8 link automatically if the slot location 5 is occupied. 2.5.5 PCI Express x8 slots (x8 link; x4 link) The onboard PCI Express x8 slots provide x8 link to the 5100MCH and x4 link to ICH9R. These slots are designed for various server class high performance add- on cards like SCSI RAID card, îber-channel card, etc. The Slot 1 (x4 link) does not function when a PIKE RAID card is installed. 2.5.6 PCI slot The PCI slot supports cards such as a LAN card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI 2.3 speciîcations. 2.5.7 PIKE slot The PIKE slot allows you to choose and change your preferred SAS solution easily . Install an optional ASUS PIKE RAID card based on your needs. PCIEx16 slot (Slot 6) PCI slot PCIEx8 slot (Slot 5; x8 link) PCIEx8 slot (Slot 1; x4 link) PIKE Interface The PIKE Interface is for ASUS PIKE RAID card only . PCIEx8 slot (x8 link)
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-23 2.5.9 Installing ASUS PIKE RAID card Follow the ste ps below to ins tall an option al ASUS RAID card on your moth erboard. 1. Locate the PIKE RAID card slot on the motherboard. 2. Align the golden îngers of the RAID card with the PIKE RAID card slot. 3. Insert the RAID card into the PIKE RAID card slot. Make sure it is completely seated on the PIKE RAID card slot. 2.5.10 Installing i Button Follow the steps below to install an optional i Button on your motherboard. 1. Locate the I Button slot on the motherboard. 2. Snap the I Button in place.
2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLR TC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! 2.6 Jumpers 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) This jumper allows you to clear the Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. Y ou can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and s ystem setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. T o erase the RTC RAM: 1. T urn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Move the jumper cap from pins 1â2 (default) to pins 2â3. Keep the cap on pin s 2â3 for about 5â 10 seconds, then move t he cap back to pi ns 1â2 . 3. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer . 4. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX Clear RTC RAM 2 1 2 3 Normal (Default) Clear CMOS CLRTC1 If the steps above do not help, remove the onboard battery and move the jumper again to clear the CMOS RTC RAM data. After the CMOS clearance, reinstall the battery .
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-25 2. VGA controller setting (3-pin VGA_SW1) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard VGA controller . Set to pins 1â2 to activate the VGA feature. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX VGA setting 2 1 2 3 Enable VGA (Default) Disable VGA_SW1 3. LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN_SW1, LAN_SW2) These jumpers allow you to enable or disable the onboard Broadcom ® BCM5721 Gigabit LAN1/2 controller . Set to pins 1â2 to activate the Gigabit LAN feature. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX LAN setting 2 1 2 3 Enable LAN (Default) Disable LAN_SW2 2 1 2 3 Enable LAN (Default) Disable LAN_SW1
2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information 4. CPU Fan control setting (3-pin CPUF AN_SEL1) This jumper allows you to switch for fan pin selection. The CPUF AN_SEL1 switch for fan pin selection. The CPUF AN_SEL1 jumper is for the CPU fans control. Set to pins 1â2 when using 4-pin fans or pins 2â3 when using 3-pin fans. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX CPUF AN setting 2 1 2 3 4-Pin FAN (Default) 3-Pin FAN CPUFAN_SEL1 ⢠If you use a 4-pin fan but set the jumper to pin 2-3, the fan you installed may not work. ⢠If you use a 3-pin fan but set the jumper for a 4-pin fan, the fan controll will not work and the fan you installed will always run at full speed. 5. System Fan control setting (3-pin CHAF AN_SEL1) This jumper allows you to switch for fan pin selection. The CHAF AN_SEL1 switch for fan pin selection. The CHAF AN_SEL1 jumper is for the system fans control. Set to pins 1â2 when using 4-pin fans or pins 2â3 when using 3-pin fans. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX CHAF AN setting 2 1 2 3 4-Pin FAN (Default) 3-Pin FAN CHAFAN_SEL1 ⢠If you use a 4-pin fan but set the jumper to pin 2 â 3, the fan you installed may not work. ⢠If you use a 3-pin fan but set the jumper for a 4-pin fan, the fan controll will not work and the fan you installed will always run at full speed.
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-27 6. IDE setting (3-pin IDE_SW1) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard IDE connector . . Set to pins 1â2 to activate the IDE connector . DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX IDE setting 2 1 2 3 Enable IDE (Default) Disable IDE_SW1 7. Force BIOS recovery setting (3-pin RECOVER Y1) This jumper allows you to quickly update or recover the BIOS settings when it becomes corrupted. T o update the BIOS: 1. Prepare a îoppy disk that contains the original or latest BIOS for the motherboard (XXXXXX.ROM) and the AFUDOS.EXE utility . 2. Set the jumper to pins 2â3. â3. 3. 3. Insert the îoppy disk then turn on the system to update the BIOS. 4. Shut down the system. 5. Set the jumper back to pins 1â2. â2. 2. 6. T urn on the system. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX BIOS recovery setting 2 1 2 3 Normal (Default) BIOS Recovery RECOVERY1 Use the AFUDOS uitility version 3.12 to îash the BIOS.
2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information 9. iBTN RAID setting (3-pin IBTN_SEL1) This jumper allows you to select the RAID conîguration utility to use when you create disk arrays. Place the jumper caps on pins 1â2 if you install a PIKE RAID card to the motherboard and want to use the LSI Logic MPT LSI Logic MPT Setup Utility (defaul t). Or you can place the jumper caps on pins 2â3 to create (default). Or you c an place the jumper caps on pins 2â3 to create the LSI Mega RAID 5 by supported Intel ® ICH9R SA T A controller . DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX IBTN setting 2 1 2 3 PIKE RAID5 (Default) ICH9R RAID5 IBTN_SEL1 8. Intel ® ICH9R SA T A port S/W RAID setting (3-pin RAID_SEL1) This jumper allows you to select the Serial A T A RAID conîguration utility to use when you create disk arrays. Both utilities are supported by the Intel ® ICH9R. Place the jumper caps on pins 1â2 if you want to use the LSI LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility (default); otherwise, place the jumper (default); otherwise, place the jumper caps on pins 2â3 to use the Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager (IMSM). DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX RAID setting 2 1 2 3 3rd (Default) Intel RAID_SEL1 ⢠LSI Logic MPT Setup Utility is available only when you install a PIKE RAID card. ⢠LSI Mega RAID 5 fucntion is available only when you place the iBTN to I_BTN1 slot and install an optional ASUS PIKE RAID card.
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-29 2.7 Connectors 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors LAN port LED indications LAN port SPEED LED ACT/LINK LED 1. PS/2 mouse port (green) . This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 2. RJ-45 port for iKVM . This RJ- 45 port functions only when y ou install ASMB3/ iKVM management card. 3. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) . This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. 4. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 . These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 5. Serial (COM1) port . This 9-pin communication port is for pointing devices or other serial devices. 6. Video Graphics Adapter port . This port is for a VGA monitor or other VGA- compatible devices. 7. LAN 1 (RJ-45) port . This port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 8. LAN 2 (RJ-45) port . This port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 2 4 6 7 8 5 1 3 Activity/Link LED Speed LED Status Description Status Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection ORANGE Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection
2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1, SA T A2, SA T A3, SA T A4, SA T A5, SA T A6; Black) These connectors, controlled by southbridge ICH9R, are for the Serial A T A signal cables for Serial A T A hard disk drives. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX SA T A connectors SA T A1 GND RSATA_TXP1 RSATA_TXN1 GND RSATA_RXP1 RSATA_RXN1 GND SA T A2 GND RSATA_TXP2 RSATA_TXN2 GND RSATA_RXP2 RSATA_RXN2 GND SA T A3 GND RSATA_TXP3 RSATA_TXN3 GND RSATA_RXP3 RSATA_RXN3 GND SA T A4 GND RSATA_TXP4 RSATA_TXN4 GND RSATA_RXP4 RSATA_RXN4 GND SA T A5 GND RSATA_TXP5 RSATA_TXN5 GND RSATA_RXP5 RSATA_RXN5 GND SA T A6 GND RSATA_TXP6 RSATA_TXN6 GND RSATA_RXP6 RSATA_RXN6 GND 2.7.2 Internal connectors 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) This connector is for the provided îoppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector , then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the îoppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. DSAN-DX ® FLOPPY NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. PIN1 DSAN-DX Floppy disk drive connector
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-31 3. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) This connector is for an Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable. The Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable has three connectors: a blue connector for the primary IDE connector on the motherboard, a black connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE slave device (optical drive/hard disk drive), and a gray connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE master device (hard disk drive). If you install two hard disk drives, you must conîgure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly . Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector . This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE devices. ⢠The onboard IDE connector is designed for ODD only (P A T A). DSAN-DX ® PRI_EIDE1 NOTE: Orient the red markings on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PIN1 DSAN-DX IDE connector
2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information 5. Hard disk activity LED connector (4-pin HDLED1) This connector is used to connect to a hard disk drive active LED connector on the SCSI or RAID card. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX Storage card activity LED connector NC ADD_IN_CARD- ADD_IN_CARD- NC HDLED 4. SAS connectors (7-pin SAS1, SAS2, SAS3, SAS4; Red) (7-pin SAS5, SAS6, SAS7, SAS8; Blue) This motherboard comes with eight (8) Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connectors, the next-generation storage technology that supports both Series SCSI and Serial A T A (SA T A). Each connector supports one device. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX SAS connectors SAS4 GND RSATA_TXP4 RSATA_TXN4 GND RSATA_RXP4 RSATA_RXN4 GND SAS3 GND RSATA_TXP3 RSATA_TXN3 GND RSATA_RXP3 RSATA_RXN3 GND SAS2 GND RSATA_TXP2 RSATA_TXN2 GND RSATA_RXP2 RSATA_RXN2 GND SAS1 GND RSATA_TXP1 RSATA_TXN1 GND RSATA_RXP1 RSATA_RXN1 GND SAS8 GND RSATA_TXP8 RSATA_TXN8 GND RSATA_RXP8 RSATA_RXN8 GND SAS7 GND RSATA_TXP7 RSATA_TXN7 GND RSATA_RXP7 RSATA_RXN7 GND SAS6 GND RSATA_TXP6 RSATA_TXN6 GND RSATA_RXP6 RSATA_RXN6 GND SAS5 GND RSATA_TXP5 RSATA_TXN5 GND RSATA_RXP5 RSATA_RXN5 GND ⢠These connectors function only when you install a PIKE RAID card. ⢠Connect the SAS hard disk drives to SAS connectors 1â4 (blue) when installing a 4-port PIKE RAID card.
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-33 6. Serial General Purpose Input/Output connector (6-1 pin SGPIO1) This connector is used for the SGPIO peripherals for the LSI MegaRAID SA T A LED. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX SGPIO connector SGPIO1 SDATAOUT0 SDATAOUT1 GND SATA_SLOAD SATA_SCLK PIN1 DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX SGPIO2/3 connectors SGPIO3 PIN 1 SIO_DIN SIO_DOUT GND GND GND SIO_END SIO_CLK SGPIO2 PIN 1 SIO_DIN SIO_DOUT GND GND GND SIO_END SIO_CLK 7. Serial General Purpose Input/Output connectors (6-1 pin SGPIO2/3) These connector is used for the SAS chip SIO interface that controls the LED pattern generation, device information and general purpose data. These connectors functions only when you install a PIKE SAS RAID card.
2-34 Chapter 2: Hardware information 8. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB34, USB56) These connectors is for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to the connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 speciîcation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. The USB port module is purchased separately . DSAN-DX ® PIN 1 NC GND USB_P6 USB_P6- USB 5V GND USB_P5 USB_P5- USB 5V USB56 PIN 1 NC GND USB_P4 USB_P4- USB 5V GND USB_P3 USB_P3- USB 5V USB34 DSAN-DX USB 2.0 connectors 9. CPU and system fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN1/2, REAR_F AN1/2, FRNT_F AN1/2/3/4) The fan c onnect ors su pport cooli ng fan s of 3 50 mAâ740 mA (8.88 W max.) or a total of 3.15 Aâ6.66 A (53.28 W max.) at 12V . Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector . DO NOT forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufîcient air îow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! DO NOT place jumper caps on the fan connectors! DSAN-DX ® FRNT_F AN1 PWM Control FAN Speed FAN Power GND CPU_F AN1 GND FAN Power FAN Speed PWM Control CPU_F AN2 GND FAN Power FAN Speed PWM Control FRNT_F AN2 GND FAN Power FAN Speed PWM Control REAR_F AN1 GND FAN Power FAN Speed PWM Control FRNT_F AN3 GND FAN Power FAN Speed PWM Control REAR_F AN2 PWM Control FAN Speed FAN Power GND FRNT_F AN4 GND FAN Power FAN Speed PWM Control CPU_FAN1 REAR_FAN2 CPU_FAN2 FRNT_FAN2 FRNT_FAN3 FRNT_FAN4 FRNT_FAN1 REAR_FAN1 DSAN-DX F AN connectors
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-35 10. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The serial port module is purchased separately . DSAN-DX ® PIN 1 COM2 DSAN-DX Serial port connectors 1 1. Power supply SMBus connector (5-pin PSUSMB1) This connector is for the power supply SMB cable, if your power supply supports the SMBus function. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX Power supply SMBus connector 12C_7_CLK# 12C_7_DATA# NC GND 3.3V Remote Sense PSUSMB1
2-36 Chapter 2: Hardware information 12. SSI po wer co nn ec tor s ( 24- pi n ATX PWR 1, 8-pin A TX12V1) These connectors are for SSI power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to ît these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down îrmly until the connectors completely ît. ⢠For a fully conîgured system, we recommend that you use an SSI 12 V -compliant power supply unit (PSU) for LGA771-socket Intel ® Xeon Dual Core processors (Bensley platform). ⢠DO NOT forget to connect the 24 8-pin power plugs; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output i s recommended when con îguring a system with more power consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠Y ou must install a PSU with a higher power rating if you intend to install additional devices. DSAN-DX ® EATXPWR1 3 Volts -12 Volts GND PSON# GND GND GND -5 Volts 5 Volts 5 Volts 5 Volts GND 3 Volts 3 Volts GND 5 Volts GND 5 Volts GND Power OK 5V Standby 12 Volts 12 Volts 3 Volts PIN 1 EATX12V1 12V DC 12V DC 12V DC 12V DC GND GND GND GND PIN 1 DSAN-DX A TX power connectors
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-37 13. System panel connector (20-pin P ANEL1; White) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. 1. System power LED (3-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector . The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power , and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. 2. Message LED (2-pin MLED) This 2-pin connector is for the message LED cable that connects to the front message LED. The message LED is controlled by Hardware monitor to indicate an abnormal event occurance. 3. System warning speaker (4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounte d system warning speaker . The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. 4. Hard disk drive activity LED (2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector . The IDE LED lights up or îashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. 5. A TX power button/soft-off button (2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF . 6. Reset button (2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power . DSAN-DX ® P ANEL1 PIN 1 POWERLED NC POWERLED- MLED MLED- NC 5V GND GND SPKROUT IDELED IDELED- NMIBTN# GND POWERBTN# GND NC RESETBTN# GND DSAN-DX System panel connector
2-38 Chapter 2: Hardware information 14. Auxiliary panel connector (20-pin AUX_P ANEL1, Black) This connector is for additional front panel features including fro nt panel SMB, locator LED and switch, chassis intrusion, and LAN LEDs. 1. Front panel SMB (6-1 pin FPSMB) These leads connect the front panel SMBus cable. 2. LAN activity LED (2-pin LAN1_LED, LAN2_LED) These leads are for Gigabit LAN activity LEDs on the front panel. 3. Chassis intrusion (4-1 pin CHASSIS) These leads are for the intrusion detection feature for chassis with intrusion sensor or microswitch. When you remove any chassis component, the sensor triggers and sends a high-level signal to these leads to record a chassis intrusion event. The default setting is short CASEOPEN and GND pin by jumper cap to disable the function. 4. Locator LED (2-pin LOCA TORLED1 and 2-pin LOCA TORLED2) These leads are for the locator LED1 and LED2 on the front panel. Connect the Locator LED cables to these 2-pin connector . The LEDs will light up when the Locator button is pressed. 5. Locator Button/Swich (2-pin LOCA TORBTN) These leads are for the locator button on the front panel. This button queries the state of the system locator . DSAN-DX ® AUX_P ANEL1 3 1 2 2 4 5 4 PIN 1 NC I2C_4_CLK# GND I2C_4_DATA# 5VSB LAN1_LINK LAN1_ACT LAN2_ACT LAN2_LINK 5VSB CASEOPEN GND LOCATORLED1 LOCATORLED1- LOCATORBTN# GND LOCATORLED2- LOCATORLED2 DSAN-DX Auxiliary panel connector
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, and ways of shutting down the system.
ASUS DSAN-DX Chapter summary 3 3.1 Starting up for the îrst time ........................................................ 3-1 3.2 T urning off the computer ............................................................. 3-2
ASUS DSAN-DX 3-1 3.1 Starting up for the î¿rst time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover . 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector . 5. T urn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. System power 6. After applying power , the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems withA TX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the A TX power button. If your monitor complies with âgreenâ standards or if it has a âpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on self tests or POST . While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps (see BIOS beep codes table below) or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you tu rned on the power , the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. 7. At power on, hold down the <Delete> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4. BIOS Beep Description One short beep VGA detected Quick boot set to disabled No keyboard detected One continuous beep followed by two short beeps then a pause (repeated) No memory detected One continuous beep followed by three short beeps No VGA detected One continuous beep followed by four short beeps Hardware component failure AMI BIOS
3-2 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.2 Turning off the computer 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function If you are using Windows ® 2003: 1. Click the Start button then click Shut Down ... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK button to shut down the computer . 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows ® shuts down. If you are using Windows ® XP: 1. Click the Start button then select T urn Off Computer . 2. Click the T urn Off button to shut down the computer . 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows ® shuts down. 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting.
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
Chapter summary 4 ASUS DSAN-DX 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................... 4-6 4.3 Main menu .................................................................................... 4-9 4.4 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 4-13 4.5 Server menu ............................................................................... 4-21 4.6 Power menu ................................................................................ 4-23 4.7 Boot menu .................................................................................. 4-27 4.8 Exit menu .................................................................................... 4-31
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup: 1. AFUDOS utility (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable îoppy disk.) 2. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 (T o recover the BIOS using a bootable îoppy disk when the BIOS île fails or gets corrupted.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS île to a bootable îoppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities. 4.1.1 Creating a bootable îoppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable îoppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB îoppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows ® XP/2003 environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB îoppy disk to the îoppy disk drive. b. Click Start from the Windows ® desktop, then select My Computer . c. Select the 3 ½ Floppy Drive icon. d. Right click File from the menu, then select Format . A Format 3½ Floppy Disk window appears. e. Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options îeld, then click Start .
4-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS île in DOS environment using a bootable îoppy disk with the updated BIOS île. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS île that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS T o copy the current BIOS île using the AFUDOS utility: ⢠Make sure that the îoppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1024 KB free space to save the île. ⢠Th e s ucc ee di ng B IO S sc re en s ar e f or re fe ren ce o nly. T he a ct ua l BI OS screen displays may not be the same as shown. 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable îoppy disk you created earlier . 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[î¿lename] where the [îlename] is any user-assigned îlename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main îlename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. Main îlename Extension name A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS île. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS île to the îoppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. Reading îash ..... done Write to î¿le...... ok A:\>
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-3 A:\>afudos /i8036A0.ROM AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îash ...... done Writing îash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) The utility veriîes the île, then starts updating the BIOS île. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! Updating the BIOS île T o update the BIOS île using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) and download the latest BIOS île for the motherboard. Save the BIOS île to a bootable îoppy disk. Write the BIOS îlename on a piece of paper . Y ou need to type the exact BIOS îlename at the DOS prompt. 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable îoppy disk you created earlier . 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt, type: afudos /i[î¿lename] where [îlename] is the latest or the original BIOS île on the bootable îoppy disk, then press <Enter>. A:\>afudos /i8036A0.ROM
4-4 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /i8036A0.ROM AM I F irm war e Upd ate Ut ili ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îash ...... done Writing îash ...... done Verifying îash .... done Please restart your computer A:\> Updating the BIOS île using a USB îash drive If you have not purchased a USB îoppy disk drive, you may update the BIOS île using a USB îash drive. Format the USB îash drive to F A T16 or 32 system île before updating the BIOS. T o format the USB îash drive to a F A T32/16 system île: 1. Insert the USB îash drive to an available USB port. 2. From the Windows desktop, click Start , then select My Computer . 3. Right-click the USB îash drive icon, then select Format from the menu. 4. From the File system îeld, select F A T32 or F A T16 , then click the Start button. T o update the BIOS île: 1. Copy the original or the latest BIOS île and the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) to the USB îash drive. 2. Insert the USB îash drive to an available USB port, then place the motherboard support CD to the optical drive. 3. Boot the system from the support CD, then select the FreeDOS command prompt . 4. At the DOS prompt, replace the prompt with the USB îash disk drive letter , then type: afudos /i[î¿lename]. 3. Follow the instructions in the previous section to update the BIOS île.
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-5 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS île when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Y ou can update a corrupted BIOS île using a îoppy disk or a USB îash drive that contains the updated BIOS île. Prepare a îoppy disk or a USB îash drive containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility . Recovering the BIOS from a îoppy disk T o recover the BIOS from a îoppy disk: 1. T urn the system. 2. Insert the îoppy disk with the original or updated BIOS île to the îoppy disk drive. 3. The utility will automatically recover the BIOS. It resets the system when the BIOS recovery înished. Recovering the BIOS from a USB îash drive T o recover the BIOS from a USB îash drive: 1. Remove any îoppy disk from the îoppy disk drive and turn the system. 2. Insert the USB îash drive with the original or updated BIOS île to one USB port on the system. 3. The utility will automatically recover the BIOS. It resets the system when the BIOS recovery înished. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while recovering the BIOS! Doing so would cause system boot failure! The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS île.
4-6 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable Low-Pin Count (LPC) chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS . Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconîguring your system, or prompted to âRun Setup.â This section explains how to conîgure your system using this utility . Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the conîguration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconîgure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the LPC chip. The LPC chip on the motherboard stores the Setup utility . When you start up the computer , the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-T est (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST , restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. Y ou can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the îrst two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The defau lt BIOS se ttings for this mot herboard apply for most cond itions to e ns ur e op ti mu m p er fo rm an ce . If t he sy st em b ec om es u ns ta bl e a ft er cha ngi ng a ny B IOS se tti ngs, lo ad t he d efa ult se tti ngs to en sure s yste m compatibility and stability . Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit Menu. See section 4.8 Exit Menu . ⢠The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only , and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS île for this motherboard.
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-7 v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Date. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.2.2 Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conîguration Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Server For changing the advanced server settings Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) conîguration Boot For changing the system boot conîguration Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings T o select an item on the menu bar , press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4.2.3 Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another . Navigation keys General help Menu bar Sub-menu items Conîguration îelds Menu items System Time [13:44:30] System Date [Tue, 10/11/2007] Legacy Diskette [1.44 MB, 3.5 in.] SATA1 : [Not Detected] SATA2 : [Not Detected] SATA3 : [Not Detected] SATA4 : [Not Detected] SATA5 : [Not Detected] SATA6 : [Not Detected] PATA Master : [Not Detected] PATA Slvae : [Not Detected] IDE Conî¿guration System Information
4-8 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2.4 Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciîc items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power , Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the item has a sub-menu. T o display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4.2.6 Conîguration îelds These îelds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user-conîgurable, you can change the value of the îeld opposite the item. Y ou cannot select an item that is not user-conîgurable. A conîgurable îeld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. T o change the value of a îeld, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to 4.2.7 Pop-up window. 4.2.7 Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conîguration options for that item. 4.2.8 Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not ît on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> /<Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. Main menu items System Time [ 11:17:09] System Date [ Tue 01/22/2008] Legacy Diskette A [1.44 MB 3.5 in.] SATA1 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA2 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA3 [N ot Det ect ed ]] SATA4 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA5 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA6 [N ot Det ect ed ] PATA Master [N ot Det ect ed ] PATA Slave [N ot Det ect ed ] IDE Conî¿guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Date. Scroll bar Pop-up window
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-9 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xx] Allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44 MB 3.5 in.] Sets the type of îoppy drive installed. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [360 KB, 5.25 in.] [1.2 MB, 5.25 in.] [720 KB, 3.5 in.] [1.44 MB, 3.5 in] [2.88 MB, 3.5 in] Refer to section 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Date. System Time [13:44:30] System Date [Tue, 10/11/2007] Legacy Diskette A [1.44 MB, 3.5 in.] SATA1 : [Not Detected] SATA2 : [Not Detected] SATA3 : [Not Detected] SATA4 : [Not Detected] SATA5 : [Not Detected] SATA6 : [Not Detected] PATA Master : [Not Detected] PATA Slvae : [Not Detected] IDE Conî¿guration System Information ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit
4-10 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.4 SA T A1â6; P A T A Master/Slave The BIOS automatically detects the connected IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item, then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, V endor , Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and S.M.A.R.T . monitoring). These values are not user-conîgurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. T ype [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are speciîcally conîguring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (A T API Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP , LS-120, or MO drive. Conîguration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CD/DVD] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-Sector T ransfer) M [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Primary IDE Master Device :Hard Disk Vendor :xxxxxxxxx Size :xx.xGB LBA Mode :Supported Block Mode:16Sectors PIO Mode :4 Async DMA :MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA :Ultra DMA-6 S.M.A.R.T.:Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-Sector Transfer)M [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] S.M.A.R.T. [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Select the type of device connected to the system. The P A T A device is for ODD (optical disk drive) only .
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-1 1 PIO Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the data transfer mode. Conîguration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] DMA Mode [Auto] Sets the DMA mode. Conîguration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] [UDMA3] [UDMA4] [UDMA5] S.M.A.R.T . [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting T echnology . Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data T ransfer [Enabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer . Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main IDE Conî¿guration SATA#1 Conî¿guration [Enhanced] Conî¿gure SATA#1 as [IDE] SATA#2 Conî¿guration [Enhanced] Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.3.5 IDE Conîguration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the conîgurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you wish to conîgure the item. Options Disabled Compatible Enhanced SA T A#1â2 Conîguration [Enhanced] Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Compatible] [Enhanced] Configure SA T A#1 as [IDE] Sets the conîguration for the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge chip. Conîguration options: [IDE] [RAID] [AHCI] If you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10, or the Intel ® Matrix Storage T echnology conîguration from the Serial A T A hard disk drives, set this item to [RAID]. If you want to use the Serial A T A hard disk drives as Parallel A T A physical storage devices, keep the default setting [IDE]. If yo u w ant t he Se ria l AT A h ard di sk d riv es to u se the Ad va nc ed Hos t C on tro lle r In ter fac e ( AH CI ), set t hi s i tem to [ AH CI] . The [AHCI] option allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial A T A features that increases storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled] Disables or enables device write protection. This will be ef fective only if device is accessed through BIOS. Conîguration option: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-13 4.3.6 System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system speciîcations. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main System Information AMIBIOS Version : 0111 Build Date: 01/25/08 Processor Speed : 1866MHz Count : 1 System Memory Usable Size : 2048MB ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. T ake caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect îeld values can cause the system to malfunction. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Exit Conî¿gure the USB support. USB Conî¿guration CPU Conî¿guration Chipset Onboard Devices Conî¿guration PCIPnP ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit AMIBIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information. Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU speciîcation. System Memory Displays the auto-detected system memory .
4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.1 USB Conîguration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîguration options. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced USB Conî¿guration Module Version - 2.24.3-13.4 USB Devices Enabled: None USB Functions [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Enabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit The USB Devices Enabled item shows the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None. USB Functions [Enabled] Allows you to enable the USB host controller . Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following item appears only when you set USB Function to [Enabled]. Legacy USB Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable support for legacy USB devices. Setting to [Auto] allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] The following item appears only when you set USB Function to [Enabled]. USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller to HiSpeed (480Mbps) or FullSpeed (12Mbps). Conîguration options: [FullSpeed] [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Enabled] Enables or disables the BIOS EHCI hand-off support. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Options Disabled Enabled
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-15 v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conî¿gure advanced CPU settings Module Version:3F.06 Manufacturer:Intel Brand String:Intel(R) Xeon(R)2 CPU 5120 Frequency :1.86GHz FSB Speed :1066 MHz Cache L1 :64 KB Cache L2 :4096 KB Ratio Status:Unlocked (Max:07, Min:06) Ratio Actual Value: 7 Ratio CMOS Setting [7] C1E Support [Enabled] Hardware Prefetcher [Enabled] Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Intel(R) Virtualization Tech [Enabled] Execute-Disable Bit Capability [Enabled] Core Multi-Processing [Enabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.4.2 CPU Conîguration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Some items may not appear if you CPU does not support the related functions. Ratio CMOS Setting [7] Whether this item is conîgurable depends on your CPU type. The valid value ranges differently according to your CPU type. If this item is conîgurable, enter the value using the numeric keypad. This item is available only when Intel SpeedStep technology is disabled. C1E Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable C1E support. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hardware Prefetcher [Enabled] Enable this item to use the Hardware Prefetcher Disable Feature. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] *Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch [Enabled] Enable this item to use the Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Disable Feature. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. Note:If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. Intel(R) SpeedStep(tm) tech. [Enabled] Scroll down for more items.
4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Max CPUID V alue Limit [Disabled] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Intel(R) Virtualization T ech [Enabled] The V anderpool Virtualization T echnology allows a hardware platform to run multiple operating systems separately , enabling one system to virtually function as several systems. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Execute-Disable Bit Capability [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the No-Execution Page Protection T echnology . Setting this item to [Disabled] forces the XD feature îag to always return to zero (0). Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Core Multi-Processing [Enabled] Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Intel(R) SpeedStep(tm) tech. [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Intel SpeedStep T echnology . Refer to the Appendix for more information on the Intel SpeedStep T echnology . Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Items above with * mark are for technical personnel to debug only .
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-17 v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Advanced Chipset Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. North Bridge Conî¿guration ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Crystal Beach / DMA [Disabled] MCH Channel Mode [Channel Interleave] Patrol Scrubbing [Enabled] Demand Scrubbing [Enabled] Channel Dependent Sparing [Disabled] Channel 0 [Enabled] Channel Speciî¿c Sparing [Disabled] Rank Interleaving [4:1] Channel 1 [Enabled] Channel Speciî¿c Sparing [Disabled] Rank Interleaving [4:1] Read Completion Coalescing [Auto] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.4.3 Chipset The Chipset conîguration menu allows you to change advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. North Bridge Conîguration The North Bridge Conîguration menu allows you to change the Northbridge settings. Conî¿gure North Bridge features. Crystal Beach / DMA conî¿guration Crystal Beach / DMA [Disabled] Allows you to do the Crystal Beach/DMA conîguration. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] MCH Channel Mode [Channel Interleave] Allows you to select the MCH channel mode. Conîguration options: [Channel Sequencing] [Channel Interleave] [Single Channel 0]
4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Patrol Scrubbing [Enabled] Enables or disables the Patrol Scrubbing. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Demand Scrubbing [Disabled] Enables or disables the Demand Scrubbing. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Channel Dependent Sparing [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disabled the channel-dependent DIMM sparing feature. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Channel 0 [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Channel 0. If you set this item to [Disabled], the following three items will be grayed out. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Channel Speciîc Sparing [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the DIMM sparing feature. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Rank Interleaving [4:1] Allows you to select the Channel 0 Rank Interleave. Conîguration options: [1:1] [2:1] [4:1] Channel 1 [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Channel 1. If you set this item to [Disabled], Channel 0 and the following two items will be grayed out. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Channel Speciîc Sparing [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the DIMM sparing feature. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Rank Interleaving [4:1] Allows you to select the Channel 1 Rank Interleave. Conîguration options: [1:1] [2:1] [4:1] Read Completion Coalescing [Auto] Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto]
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-19 v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conî¿gure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] OnBoard LAN1 Boot ROM [Enabled] OnBoard LAN2 Boot ROM [Enabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.4.4 Onboard Device Conîguration Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Allows you to select the Serial Port2 base address. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Onboard LAN1/2 Boot ROM [Enabled] Allows you to do the LAN Boot ROM conîguration. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Allows BIOS to Enable or Disable Floppy Controller.
4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug & Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.4.5 PCIPnP The PCIPnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. T ake caution when changing the settings of the PCI/PnP Conîguration menu items. Incorrect îeld values can cause the system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS conîgures all the devices in the system. When set to [Y es] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system conîgures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. Conîguration options: [No] [Y es] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register . Conîguration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Y es] When set to [Y es], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Conîguration options: [Y es] [No] Palette Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the pallete snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly . Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] NO: lets the BIOS conî¿gure all the devices in the system. YES: lets the operating system conî¿gure Plug and Play (PnP) devices not required for boot if your system has a Plug and Play operating system.
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-21 4.5.2 Remote Access Conîguration The items in this menu allows you to conîgure the Remote Access features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîguration options. Remote Access [Enabled] Enables or disables the remote access feature. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following items appear only when Remote Access is set to [Enabled]. 4.5 Server menu v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Exit ASF Support [Enabled] Remote Access Conî¿guration ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Server Conî¿gure Remote Access type and parameters Remote Access [Enabled] Serial port number [COM2] Base Address, IRQ [2F8h, 3] Serial Port Mode [115200 8,n,1] Flow Control [None] Redirection After BIOS POST [Disabled] Terminal Type [ANSI] VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support [Enabled] Sredir Memory Display Delay [No Delay] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Conî¿gure Remote Access. Select Remote Access type. 4.5.1 ASF Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASF support. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Serial port number [COM2] Selects the serial port for console redirection. Conîguration options: [COM1] [COM2] Base Address. IRQ [2F8h, 3] This item is not user-conîgurable and changes with the conîguration of Serial port number . Serial port Mode [1 15200 8,n,1] Sets the Serial port mode. Conîguration options: [1 15200 8,n,1] [57600 8,n,1] [38400 8,n,1] [19200 8,n,1] Flow Control [None] Allows you to select the îow control for console redirection. Conîguration options: [None] [Hardware] [Software] Redirection After BIOS POST [Disabled] Sets the redirection mode after the BIOS Power-On Self-T est (POST). Some operating system may not work when set to [Always]. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Boot Loader] [Always] T erminal T ype [ANSI] Allows you to select the target terminal type. Conîguration options: [ANSI] [VT100] [VT -UTF8] VT -UTF8 Combo Key Support [Enabled] Enables or disables the VT -UTF8 combo key support for ANSI or VT100 terminals. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Sredir Memory Display Delay [No Delay] Sets the delay seconds to display memory information. Conîguration options: [No Delay] [Delay 1 Sec] [Delay 2 Sec] [Delay 4 Sec]
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-23 4.6 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the Advanced Power Management (APM). Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîguration options. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Exit ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conî¿guration Hardware Monitor ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Add additional tables as per ACPI 2.0 speciî¿cations. 4.6.1 ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] Speciîes the Advanced Conîguration and Power Interface (ACPI) version supported. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.6.2 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Conîguration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to [Power Off], the system goes into of f state after an AC power loss. When set to [Power On], the system will reboot after an AC power loss. When set to [Last State], the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Conîguration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] This allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Resume On PME [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the system enables the PME to generate a wake event while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Resume On RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake-up event. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On by PME [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit <Enter> to select whether or not to restart the system after AC power loss 4.6.3 APM Conîguration
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-25 v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit TD conî¿guration mode setting 4.6.4 Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor CPU1 :N/A CPU2 :33ºC/91ºF System1 :38ºC/102ºF System2 :35ºC/95ºF CPU Fan1 :N/A CPU Fan2 :1713 RPM FRN FAN1 :N/A FRN FAN2 :N/A FRN FAN3 :N/A FRN FAN4 :N/A REAR FAN1 :N/A REAR FAN2 :N/A FAN Control Mode [SmartFan II Mode] CPU1 TargetTemp Value [ 55] CPU1 TargetTemp Value [ 55] System1 TargetTemp Value [ 55] System2 TargetTemp Value [ 55] CPU1/CPU2 [xxxºC/xxxºF] System1/2 [xxxºC/xxxºF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Ignored] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. The CPU2 T emperature shows N/A if no processor is installed in CPU2 socket. CPU F AN1/2; FRN F AN1/2/3/4; REAR F AN1/2 [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU, front, and rear fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îeld shows N/A. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. VCOREA Voltage :0.096 V VCOREB Voltage :1.328 V Vtt Voltage :1.216 V VSEN1 :1.504 V VSEN2 :1.792 V 3VSEN :3.328 V 12VSEN :12.288 V 5VDD :4.920 V 5VSB :4.944 V VBAT :3.136 V ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Scroll down for more items.
4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup F AN Control Mode [SmartFan II Mode] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Smart Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efîcient system operation. Conîguration options: [SmartFan Mode] [SmartFan II Mode] [Manual Mode] The following items appear only when you set F AN Control Mode to [SmartFan Mode] or [SmartFan II Mode]. CPU1 T argetT emp V alue [ 55] Allows you to set the CPU1 target temperature. Conîguration options: [18]â[85] CPU2 T argetT emp V alue [ 55] Allows you to set the CPU2 target temperature. Conîguration options: [18]â[85] System1 T argetT emp V alue [ 55] Allows you to set the system1 target temperature. Conîguration options: [18]â[80] System2 T argetT emp V alue [ 55] Allows you to set the system2 target temperature. Conîguration options: [18]â[80] The following item appears only when you set the F AN Control Mode to [Manual Mode] F AN Control (%) [100] Allows you to set the fan control ratio. Use the numeric keys to enter or < > <-> keys to change the fan ratio. Conîguration options: [0]â[100] VCOREA, VCOREB, Vtt, VSEN1, VSEN2, 3VSEN, 12VSEN, 5VDD, 5VSB, VBA T The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators. The VCOREB item shows N/A if no processor is installed in CPU2 socket.
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-27 4.7 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. 4.7.1 Boot Device Priority 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [XXXXXXX] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. Conîguration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Exit Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Conî¿guration Security ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server SecuritBoot Exit Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [ATAPI CD-ROM] 3rd Boot Device [Network:MBA v10.0.] 4th Boot Device [Network:MBA v10.0.] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Speciî¿es the Boot Device Priority sequence. A virtual îoppy disk drive (Floppy Drive B: ) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the î¿rst boot device. Speciî¿es the Boot Device Priority sequence. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding type menu.
4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.7.2 Boot Settings Conîguration Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Allows you to set the display mode for Options ROM. Conîguration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Conîguration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] W ait For âF1â If Error [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], the system waits for the <F1> key to be pressed when error occurs. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], the system displays the message âPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST . Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Security Boot Exit Boot Settings Conî¿guration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Enabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system.
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-29 Interrupt 19 Capture [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.7.3 Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîguration options. Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed . After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conîrm the password when prompted. The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. T o change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. T o clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press <Enter>. The message âPassword Uninstalledâ appears. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear it by erasing the CMOS Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM. See section 2.6 Jumper for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Tools Exit Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Password ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Change F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password.
4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Conîguration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility . View Only allows access but does not allow change to any îeld. Limited allows changes only to selected îelds, such as Date and T ime. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the îelds in the Setup utility . Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conîrm the password when prompted. The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully . T o change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility . When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Conîguration options: [Setup] [Always] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Tools Exit Supervisor Password : Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Password Check [Setup] <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password.
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-31 4.8 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Exit Save Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. Exit & Save Changes Once you are înished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the PC is turned off. When you select this option, a conîrmation window appears. Select YES to save changes and exit. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to îelds other than System Date, System T ime, and Password, the BIOS asks for a conîrmation before exiting. Discard Changes This option allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a conîrmation appears. Select YES to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Load Setup Defaults This option allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a conîrmation window appears. Select YES to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes or make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM.
4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup
5 RAID conî¿guration This chapter provides instructions for setting up, creating, and conîguring RAID sets using the available utilities.
ASUS DSAN-DX Chapter summary 5 5.1 Setting up RAID ............................................................................ 5-1 5.2 LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility .................................... 5-3 5.3 Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility ................. 5-30
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-1 5.1 Setting up RAID The motherboard comes with the following RAID solutions: ⢠LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility embeded in the Intel ICH9R Southbridge supports Serial A T A hard disk drives and RAID0, RAID1, and RAID10 conîgurations. ⢠Intel Matrix Storage Manager embeded in the Intel ICH9R Southbridge supports Serial A T A hard disk drives and RAID0, RAID1, RAID10, and RAID5 conîguration. 5.1.1 RAID deînitions RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. T wo hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RA ID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conîguration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 10 is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 10 conîguration you get all the beneîts of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 conîgurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 conîguration include better HDD performanc e, fault tolerance, and highe r storage capacity . The RA ID 5 conî guration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and o ther business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy îrst the RAID driver from the support CD to a îoppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive.
5-2 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.1.2 Installing hard disk drives The motherboard supports Serial A T A for RAID set conîguration. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array . T o install the SA T A hard disks for RAID conîguration: 1. Install the SA T A hard disks into the drive bays following the instructions in the system user guide. 2. Connect a SA T A signal cable to the signal connector at the back of each drive and to the SA T A connector on the motherboard. 3. Connect a SA T A power cable to the power connector on each drive . 5.1.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS Y ou must set the RAID item in the BIOS Setup before you can create a RAID set from SA T A hard disk drives attached to the SA T A connectors supported by the Intel ® ICH9R Southbridge chip. T o do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST . 2. Go to the Main Menu > IDE Conîguration , then press <Enter>. 3. Set the SA T A#1 Conîguration item to [Enhanced]. 4. Set the Conîgure SA T A#1 as item to [RAID]. 5. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to Chapter 4 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup. 5.1.4 RAID conîguration utilities Depending on the RAID connectors that you use, you can create a RAID set using the utilities embedded in each RAID controller . For example, use the LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility or the Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager if you installed Serial A T A hard disk drives on the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Intel ® ICH9R Southbridge. Refer to the succeeding sections for details on how to use each RAID conîguration utility .
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-3 3. The utility main window appears. Use the arrow keys to select an option from the Management Menu , then press <En ter>. Refer to the Management Me nu descriptions on the next page. At the bottom of the screen is the legend box. The keys on the legend box allow you to navigate through the setup menu options or execute commands. The keys on the legend box vary according to the menu level. 5.2 LSI Sof tware RAID Conî¿gurati on Uti lity Th e LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility all ows y ou to cr eat e RA ID 0, RA ID 1, or R AID 1 0 set (s) f ro m S ATA ha rd d isk dr iv es co nne cte d to th e S ATA co nne cto rs su pp ort ed by t he mot her bo ar d S out hb ri dge ch ip. T o enter the LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility: 1. T urn on the system after installing all the SA T A hard disk drives. 2. During POST , the LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility automatically detects the installed SA T A hard disk drives and displays any existing RAID set(s). Press <Ctrl> <M> to enter the utility . ⢠The LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utitlity auto conîgures to RAID 1 when the SA T A to RAID Mode is enabled. ⢠The RAID setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen due to the controller version difference. ⢠When you create RAID sets with the LSI Software RAID conîguration utility , the boot priority of the SA T A optical drive has to be manually adjusted. Otherwise, the system will not boot from the connected SA T A ODD. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Conî¿gure VD(s) LSI MegaRAID Software RAID BIOS Version A.01 08131852R LSI SATA RAID Found at PCI Bus No: Dev No:1F Device present at Port 0 HDS722512VLSA80 117800MB Device present at Port 1 HDS722512VLSA80 117800MB Press Ctrl-M or Enter to run LSI Software RAID Setup Utility.
5-4 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.2.1 Creating a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set The LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility allows you to create a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set using two types of conîgurations: Easy and New . In Easy Conîguration , the logical drive parameters are set automatically inc luding the size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). In New Conîguration , you manually set the logical drive parameters and assign the set size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). Using Easy Conîguration T o create a RAID set using the Easy Conîguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conîgure , then press <Enter>. 2. Us e t he arr ow k eys to s el ect Ea sy Con îgu ra tio n , the n p res s <E nte r>. Menu Description Conîgure Allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1 or RAID 10 set using the Easy Conîguration or the New Conîguration command. This menu also allows you to view , add, or clear RAID conîgurations or select the boot drive Initialize Allows you to initialize the logical drives of a created RAID set Objects Allows you to initialize logical drives or change the logical drive parameters Rebuild Allows you to rebuild failed drives Check Consistency Allows you to check the data consistency of the logical drives of a created RAID set LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Deî¿nes Physical Arrays. An Array Will Automatically Become A VD Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-5 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conîgurable array appears on screen. 3. The ARRA Y SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drives you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y] , where X is the array number , and Y is the drive number . The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-Sel,ENTER-EndArray,F10-Conî¿gure,F2-Drive Info,F3-Logical Drives,F4-HSP Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 0 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU PORT # READY READY 0 1 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-Sel,ENTER-EndArray,F10-Conî¿gure,F2-Drive Info,F3-Logical Drives,F4-HSP Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 1 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU PORT # ONLIN A00-00 ONLIN A00-01 0 1
5-6 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5. Press <F10>, select the conîgurable array , then press <SpaceBar>. Press <F10> again, the logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Cursor Keys, SPACE-(De)Select F2-ChIdInfo F3-SlotInfo F10-Conî¿gure Esc-Quit Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Select Conî¿gurable Array(s) A-0 SPAN-1 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 1 Size = 77247MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Choose RAID Level For This VD
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-7 6. Select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 7. Select the RAID level from the menu, then press <Enter>. Yo u n eed at lea st two i den tica l h ard di sk d riv es whe n c re ati ng a RA ID 1 s et. 8. When creating a RAID 1 set, select DWC from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. When creating a RAID 0 set, proceed to step 10. 9. Select On to enable the Disk Write Cache setting, then press <Enter>. Enabling DWC can improve the performance, but with the risk of data loss. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 1 Size = 77247MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Choose RAID Level For This VD RAID Level RAID 0 RAID 1 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 1 Size = 77247MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Disk Write Cache Setting Of VD Change DWC Off On
5-8 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 10. When înished setting the selected logical drive conîguration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 1 1. Follow steps 5 to 10 to conîgure additional logical drives. 12. When prompted, save the conîguration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu . LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 1 Size = 77247MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Accept This VD Conî¿guration And Go To Next VD LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency Select Yes Or No Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Save Conî¿guration? Yes No
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-9 Using New Conîguration When a RAI D set i s alre ady exi sting, using the New Conîgu ration com mand eras es the existi ng RAI D conîg uratio n data . If you d o not w ant to delete the exis ting R AID set , use the View /Add C onîgura tion com mand t o view or cre ate anot her RA ID conî gurati on. T o create a RAID set using the New Conîguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conîgure , then press <Enter>. 2. Use the arrow keys to select New Conîguration , then press <Enter>. 3. Follow steps 3 to 7 of the previous section. 4. Select Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 5. Key-in the desired logical drive size, then press <Enter>. 6. Follow steps 8 to 13 of the previous section to create the RAID set. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Clear Existing Conî¿guration And Start A New Conî¿guration Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 1 Size = 77247MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Enter VD Size (MB): Enter VD Size (MB): 77247
5-10 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.2.2 Creating a RAID 10 set Y ou can create a RAID 10 set using four identical hard disk drives. T o create a RAID 10 set using the Easy Conîguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conîgure , then press <Enter>. 2. Us e t he arr ow k eys to s el ect Ea sy Con îgu ra tio n , the n p res s <E nte r>. 3. The ARRA Y SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drive(s) you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y ], where X is the array number , and Y is the drive number . The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Deî¿nes Physical Arrays. An Array Will Automatically Become A VD Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-Sel,ENTER-EndArray,F10-Conî¿gure,F2-Drive Info,F3-Logical Drives,F4-HSP Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 0 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU PORT # READY READY READY READY 0 1 2 3
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-1 1 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. The conîgurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conîgurable array , then press <SpaceBar>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-Sel,ENTER-EndArray,F10-Conî¿gure,F2-Drive Info,F3-Logical Drives,F4-HSP Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 1 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU PORT # ONLIN A00-00 ONLIN A00-01 ONLIN A00-02 ONLIN A00-03 0 1 2 3 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Cursor Keys, SPACE-(De)Select F2-ChIdInfo F3-SlotInfo F10-Conî¿gure Esc-Quit Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Select Conî¿gurable Array(s) A-0 SPAN-1
5-12 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration Press <F10> again, the logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters. 6. Select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 7. Select RAID 10 from the menu, then press <Enter>. Yo u ne ed a t le as t fo ur i de nti ca l ha rd d is k dr iv es w he n cr ea ti ng a R AID 1 0 se t. 8. Select DWC from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 9. Select On to enable the Disk Write Cache setting, then press <Enter>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 0 308988MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 0 Size = 308988MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Choose RAID Level For This VD RAID = 0 RAID 5 RAID 10 RAID Level LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 O NLIN A00-03 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 308988MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 1 Size = 154494MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Disk Write Cache Setting Of VD Change DWC Off On
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-13 10. When înished setting the selected logical drive conîguration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 1 1. When prompted, save the conîguration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu . LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 O NLIN A00-03 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 308988MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 10 Size = 308988MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Accept This VD Conî¿guration And Go To Next VD LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency Select Yes Or No Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 308988MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Save Conî¿guration? Yes No
5-14 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.2.3 Adding or viewing a RAID conîguration Y ou can add a new RAID conîguration or view an existing conîguration using the View/Add Conîguration command. Adding a new RAID conîguration T o add a new RAID conîguration: 1. Fro m the Man agemen t Menu , h ighlig ht Con îgure , t hen pr ess <E nter>. 2. Use the arrow keys to select View/Add Conîguration , then press <Enter>. 3. The ARRA Y SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drive(s) you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y] , where X is the array number , and Y is the drive number . The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency View/Add to The Existing Conî¿guration Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-Sel,ENTER-EndArray,F10-Conî¿gure,F2-Drive Info,F3-Logical Drives,F4-HSP Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 0 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU PORT # READY READY 0 1
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-15 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conîgurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conîgurable array , then press <SpaceBar>. 6. Press <F10> again, and select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-Sel,ENTER-EndArray,F10-Conî¿gure,F2-Drive Info,F3-Logical Drives,F4-HSP Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 3 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU PORT # ONLIN A00-00 ONLIN A00-01 ONLIN A01-00 ONLIN A01-01 0 1 2 3 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Cursor Keys, SPACE-(De)Select F2-ChIdInfo F3-SlotInfo F10-Conî¿gure Esc-Quit Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 View/Add Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Select Conî¿gurable Array(s) A-0 SPAN-1
5-16 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 8. Follow steps 8 to 12 of the Creating a RAID set: Using Easy Conîguration section. 9. When prompted, save the conîguration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu . 10. Follow steps 8 to 13 of the Creating a RAID set: Using Easy Conîguration section to add the new RAID conîguration. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 0 154494MB 2 64 KB ONLINE 0 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 1 RAID = 1 Size = 77247MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Choose RAID Level For This VD RAID Level RAID 0 RAID 1 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency Select Yes Or No Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 0 154494MB 2 64 KB ONLINE 1 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Save Conî¿guration? Yes No 7. Select the RAID level from the menu, then press <Enter>.
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-17 5.2.4 Initializing the logical drives After creating the RAID set(s), you must initialize the logical drives. Y ou may initialize the logical drives of a RAID set(s) using the Initialize or Objects command on the Management Menu . Using the Initialize command T o initialize the logical drive using the Initialize command: 1. From the Management Menu , highlight Initialize , then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to initialize. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <Enter>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Initialize Logical Drive(s) LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select, F10-Check Consistency Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Select VD Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 154494MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drives Loical Drive 0
5-18 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 3. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Y es from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. Y ou may also press <F10> to initialize the drive without conîrmation. Initializing a logical drive(s) erases all data on the drive. 4. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select, F10-Check Consistency Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 154494MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drives Loical Drive 0 Initialize? Yes No Initilize Will Destroy Data On Selected VD(s) LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select, F10-Initialize Management Menu Conî¿gure Initiali ze Objects Rebuild Check Co nsistency Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 154494MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logica l Drives Loical Drive 0 Initialization Of LD Is In Process LD 0 Initialization. Press Esc to Abort. ¦ 85 % Completed
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-19 5. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>. Using the Objects command T o initialize the logical drives using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu , highlight Objects , then press <Enter>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select, F10-Initialize Management Menu Conî¿gure Initiali ze Objects Rebuild Check Co nsistency Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 154494MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logica l Drives Loical Drive 0 Initialization Of LD Is In Process LD 0 Initialization Complete. Press Esc.. ¦ 100 % Completed LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Conî¿gure Objects Like Adapter Parameters
5-20 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 2. Select Virtual Drive from the Objects sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 3. Select the logical drive to initialize from the Virtual Drives sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 4. Select Initialize from the pop-up menu, then press <Enter> to start initialization. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Change VD Parameters Objects Adapter Virtual Drive Physical Drive LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Press ENTER To Select A VD, <DEL> To Delete A VD Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Select VD Obj ects Adapter Virtual Drive Physical Drive Vitual Drive(1) Logical Drive 0 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Initilize VD Obj ects Adapter Virtual Drive Physical Drive Vitual Drive(1) Logical Drive 0 Initialze Check Consistency View/Update Parameters Vitual Drive(0)
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-21 5. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Y es from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. 6. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization. 7. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Initilize Will Destroy Data On Selected VD(s) Obj ects Adapter Virtual Drive Physical Drive Vitual Drive(1) Logical Drive 0 Initialze Check Consistency View/Updat e Parameters Vitual Drive(0) Initialize? Yes No LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency Obj ects Adapter Virtual Drive Physical Drive Vitual Drive(1) Logical Drive 0 Initialze Check Consistency View/Update Parameters Vitual Drive(0) Initialize? Yes No Initilization Of VD Is In Process VD 0 Initialization. Press Esc to Abort. ¦ 55 % Completed LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency Obj ects Adapter Virtual Drive Physical Drive Vitual Drive(1) Logical Drive 0 Initialze Check Consistency View/Update Parameters Vitual Drive(0) Initialize? Yes No Initialization Of VD Is In Process VD 0 Initialization Complete. Press Esc.. ¦ 100 % Completed
5-22 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.2.5 Rebuilding failed drives Y ou can manually rebuild failed hard disk drives using the Rebuild command in the Management Menu. T o rebuild a failed hard disk drive: 1. From the Management Menu , highlight Rebuild , then press <Enter>. 2. The PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drive you want to rebuild, then press <SpaceBar>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Rebuild PD(s) LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-Sel,ENTER-EndArray,F10-Conî¿gure,F2-Drive Info,F3-Logical Drives,F4-HSP Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 1 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A REBUILD - PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU PORT # ONLIN A00-00 FAIL A00-01 0 1
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-23 3. After selectin g the drive to rebuild, press <F10>. The indicator for the sele cted drive now shows RBLD . 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to rebuild the drive. 5. When rebuild is complete, press any key to continue. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select,F10-Start Rebuild,F2-Drive Information,F3-View Logical Drives Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 1 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A REBUILD - PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU PORT # ONLIN A00-00 RBLD A00-01 0 1 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select,F10-Start Rebuild,F2-Drive Information,F3-View Logical Drives Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Port # 1 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A REBUILD - PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU PORT # ONLIN A00-00 R B L D A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Rebuilding Of Drive Will Take A Few Minutes. Start Rebuilding Drive (Y/N)?
5-24 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.2.6 Checking the drives for data consistency Y ou can check and verify the accuracy of data redundancy in the selected logical drive. The utility can automatically detect and/or detect and correct any dif ferences in data redundancy depending on the selected option in the Objects > Adapter menu. The Check Consistency command is available only for logical drives included in a RAID 1 set. Using the Check Consistency T o check data consistency using the Check Consistency command: 1. From the Management Menu , select Check Consistency , then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to check. Press the <Spacebar> to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <F10>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency CC Of VD(s) LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select, F10-Check Consistency Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Select VD Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 154494MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drives Loical Drive 0
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-25 3. When prompted, use the arrow keys to select Y es from the Consistency Check dialog box, then press <Enter>. Y ou may also press <F10> to check the drive consistency . A progress bar appears on screen. 4. While checking the disk consistency , press <Esc> to display the following options. ⢠Stop - Stops the consistency check. The utility stores the percentage of disk checked, When you restart checking, it continues from the last percentage completed rather than from zero percent. ⢠Continue - Continues the consistency check. ⢠Abort - Aborts the consistency check. When you restart checking, it continues from zero percent. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select, F10-Check Consistency Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 154494MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drives Loical Drive 0 Consistency Check? Yes No Select VD LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select, F10-Check Consistency Management Menu Conî¿gure Initiali ze Objects Rebuild Check Co nsistency Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 154494MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logica l Drives Loical Drive 0 CC Under Process VD 0 Consistency Check. Press Esc to Abort. ¦ 85 % Completed The Data On The Drives Is Inconsistency. Repair Done!
5-26 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration Using the Objects command T o check data consistency using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu , select Objects , then select Logical Drive from the menu. 2. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive you want to check, then press <Enter>. 3. Select Check Consistency from the pop-up menu, then press <Enter>. 4. When prompted, use the arrow keys to select Y es from the dialog box to check the drive. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue.
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-27 5.2.7 Deleting a RAID conîguration T o delete a RAID conîguration: 1. From the Management Menu , select Conîgure > Clear Conîguration , then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, use the arrow keys to select Y es from the Clear Conîguration? dialog box, then press <Enter>. The utility clears the current array . 3. Press any key to continue. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Clear Existing Conî¿guration Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Clear Existing Conî¿guration Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/A dd Co nî¿gura tion Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive Clear Conî¿guration? Yes No
5-28 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.2.8 Selecting the boot drive from a RAID set Y ou must have created a new RAID conîguration before you can select the boot drive from a RAID set. Refer to the Creating a RAID set: Using New Conîguration section for details. T o select the boot drive from a RAID set: 1. From the Management Menu , select Conîgure > Select Boot Drive , then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, use the arrow keys to select the bootable logical drive from the list, then press <Enter>. 3. The logical drive is selected as boot drive. Press any key to continue. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Select A Boot VD Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Select A Boot VD Conî¿gu ration Menu Easy Con î¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive Bootable VDs(1):Current Boot VD(0) Boot Drive 0
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-29 5.2.9 Enabling the WriteCache Y ou may enable the RAID controllerâs WriteCache option to improve the data transmission performance. Wh en you ena ble Wr ite Cach e , you may lo se dat a w he n a pow er int err upti on oc cur s wh ile tr ans mit ti ng or e xch ang ing dat a a mon g t he dr ive s. T o enable WriteCache: 1. From the Management Menu , select Objects > Adapter , then press <Enter> to display the adapter properties. 2. Select WriteCache , then press <Enter> to turn the option On (enabled). 3. When înished, press any key to continue. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Disk Write Cache - Off(Write Through) or On(Write Back) Objec ts Adapter Virtual Driv e Physical Dri ve Adapter 0 Rebuild Rate = 30 Chk Const Rate = 30 FGI Rate = 30 BGI Rate = 30 Disk WC = Off Read Ahead = On Bios State = Enable Stop On Error = No Fast Init = Enable Auto Rebuild = On Auto Resume = Enable Disk Coercion = 1GB Factory Default
5-30 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.3 Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility The Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, and RAID 5 set(s) from Serial A T A hard disk drives. T o enter the Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility: 1. T urn on the system after installing all Serial A T A hard disk drives. 2. During POST , press <Ctrl I> to display the utility main menu. The navigation keys at the bottom of the screen allow you to move through the menus and select the menu options. The RAID setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen due to the controller version difference. In te l(R ) Mat ri x St or age M ana ge r O pt io n RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R w RAI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None deî¿ned. Physical Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status(Vol ID) 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk [ ââ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu The utility supports maxium four hard disk drives for RAID conîgurration.
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-31 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) T o create a RAID 0 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level , press the up/down a rrow key to select RAID 0 (Stripe) , then press <Enter>. 4. Highlight the Disks item, then press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives you want to include in the RAID set. The SELECT DISKS screen appears. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight a drive, then press <Spacebar> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection. In te l(R ) Mat ri x St or age M ana ge r O pt io n RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R w RAI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a s tr i ng be t we en 1 a nd 16 ch a ra ct e rs in le n gt h t ha t c a n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume0 RAID0(Stripe) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ SELECT DISKS ] [ ââ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. [ ââ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu
5-32 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 6. Use the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 0 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 128 KB. A lower stripe size is recommended for server systems. A higher stripe size is recommended for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Highlight the Capacity item, enter the desired RAID volume capacity , then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 8. When the Create V olume item is highlighted, press <Enter>. A warning message appears. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu, or <N> to go back to the Create Array menu.
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-33 5.3.2 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) T o create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. In te l(R ) Mat ri x St or age M ana ge r O pt io n RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R w RAI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a s tr i ng be t we en 1 a nd 16 ch a ra ct e rs in le n gt h t ha t c a n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A 0.0 GB Create Volume [ ââ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu 2. Enter a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level , press the up /down arrow key to select RAID 1 (Mirror ) , then press <Enter>. 4. Follow steps 4 to 5 and 7 to 9 of the previous section to create the RAID 1 set.
5-34 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.3.3 Creating a RAID 10 set (Stripe Mirror) T o create a RAID 10 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. In te l(R ) Mat ri x St or age M ana ge r O pt io n RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R w RAI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a s tr i ng be t we en 1 a nd 16 ch a ra ct e rs in le n gt h t ha t c a n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID10(RAID0 1) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ ââ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu 2. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level , press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 10 (RAID0 1) , then press <Enter>. 4. Follow steps 4 to 9 of section 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) to create the RAID 10 set.
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-35 5.3.4 Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) T o create a RAID 5 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. In te l(R ) Mat ri x St or age M ana ge r O pt io n RO M v5.6.2.1002 ESB2 w RAI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a s tr i ng be t we en 1 a nd 16 ch a ra ct e rs in le n gt h t ha t c a n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID5(Parity) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ ââ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu 2. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level , press the up/down arrow key to select RAID5 , then press <Enter>. 4. Follow steps 4 to 9 of section 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) to create the RAID 5 set.
5-36 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.3.5 Deleting a RAID set T ake caution when deleting a RAID set. Y ou will lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID set. T o delete a RAID set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 2. Delete RAID V olume , then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to select the RAID set you want to delete, then press <Del>. This window appears. 3. Press <Y> to delete the RAID set and return to the utility main menu; otherwise, press <N> to return to the Delete V olume menu. ALL DATA IN THE VOLUME WILL BE LOST! A re y o u s ur e y o u w an t t o d el e te vo l um e â Vo l um e Xâ ? ( Y /N ): [ DELETE VOLUME VERIFICATION ] In te l(R ) Mat ri x St or age M ana ge r O pt io n RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R w RAI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ DELETE VOLUME MENU ] Name Level Drives Capacity Status Bootable Volume0 RAIDX(xxxxx) X XXX.XGB Normal Yes [ HELP ] D e l e t i n g a v o l u m e w i l l d e s t r o y t h e v o l u m e d a t a o n t h e d r i v e ( s ) a n d c a u s e a n y m e m b e r d i s k s t o b e c o m e a v a i l a b l e a s n o n - R A I D d i s k s . W A R N I N G : EXISTING DATA WITHIN THIS VOLUME WILL BE LOST AND NON-RECOVERABLE. [ ââ ]-Select [<ESC>]-Previous Menu [<Del>]-Delete Volume
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-37 5.3.7 Exiting the Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager T o exit the utility: 1. From the utility main menu, select 4. Exit , then press <Enter>. This window appears. Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N): [ CONFIRM EXIT ] 2. Press <Y> to exit or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. 5.3.6 Resetting disks to Non-RAID Take cauti on befo re you reset a RAID volum e hard disk drive to non-RAID. Resetting a RAID volume hard disk drive deletes all internal RAID structure on the drive. T o reset a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. From the utility main menu, select 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID , then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the RAID set drive you want to reset, then press <Spacebar> to select. 3. Press <Enter> to reset the RAID set drive. A conîrmation message appears. 4. Press <Y> to reset the drive or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. 5. Follow steps 2 to 4 to select and reset other RAID set drives. [ RESET RAID DATA ] Re sett ing RAI D data wil l r emov e in ter na l RA ID s tru ct ures from the selected RAID disks. By removing the se structures, the drive will revert back to a non-RAID disk. WARNING: Resetting a disk causes all data on the disk to be lost. Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk Select the disks that should be reset. [ ââ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete
5-38 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration
6 Driver installation This chapter provides instructions for installing the necessary drivers for different system components.
ASUS DSAN-DX Chapter summary 6 6.1 RAID driver installation ............................................................... 6-1 6.2 Intel chipset device installation ................................................ 6-10 6.3 LAN driver installation ............................................................... 6-13 6.4 VGA driver installation............................................................... 6-16 6.5 Management application and utilities installation .................. 6-18
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-1 6.1 RAID driver installation After creating the RAID sets for your server system, you are now ready to install an operating system to the independent hard disk drive or bootable array . This part provides instructions on how to install the RAID controller drivers during OS installation. 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk Y ou may have to use another system to create the RAID driver disk from the system/motherboard support CD or from the Internet. If you have created RAID sets with the LSI Software RAID conîguration utility , the boot priority of the SA T A optical disk drive has to be manually adjusted. Otherwise, the system will not boot from the connected SA T A ODD. A îoppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows ® 2003 or Red Hat ® Enterprise operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. Y ou can create a RAID driver disk in DOS (using the Makedisk application in the support CD). T o create a RAID driver disk in DOS environment: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Restart the computer , then enter the BIOS Setup. 3. Select the optical drive as the îrst boot priority to boot from the support CD. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. 4. Restart the computer . 5. Press any key when prompted to boot from CD. The Makedisk menu appears. Loading FreeDOS FAT KERNEL GO! Press any key to boot from CDROM... Create Driver Diskette Menu ICH9R INTEL RAID Driver ITE IT8213F Linux Driver Broadcom ASF Firmware Update FreeDOS command prompt 6. Use the arrow keys to select the type of RAID driver disk you want to ceate and press <Enter> to enter the sub-menu.
6-2 Chapter 6: Driver installation INTEL 6321 MATRIX STORAGE MANAGER Driver Windows 32 bit Windows 64 bit Back Exit ICH9R INTEL RAID Driver ITE IT8213F Linux Driver 7. Locate the RAID driver and place a blank, high-density îoppy disk to the îoppy disk drive. 8. Press <Enter>. 9. Follow screen instructions to create the driver disk. ITE IT8213F Linux Driver RHEL AS4 UP5 32/64 bit RHEL AS4 UP6 32/64 bit RHEL 5 32/64 bit RHEL 5 UP1 32/64 bit Back Exit
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-3 T o create a RAID driver disk in Windows ® 2003 Server environment: 1. Restart the system from the hard disk drive, then place the system/ motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Browse the contents of the support CD to locate the driver disk utility . The Windows 32-bit OS RAID driver disk for the Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager is located in: \ Drivers\ ICH9R Intel RAID\Driver\makedisk\win32\f6îpy32.exe The Windows 2003 64-bit OS RAID driver disk for the Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager is located in: \ Drivers\ ICH9R Intel RAID\Driver\makedisk\win32\f6îpy64.exe 3. Insert a formatted high-density îoppy disk to the îoppy disk drive. 4. Follow screen instructions to complete the process. 5. After creating a RAID driver disk, eject the îoppy disk, then write-protect it to prevent computer virus infection. T o create a RAID driver disk in Red Hat ® Enterprise Linux server environment: 1. Insert a blank formatted high-density îoppy disk to the îoppy disk drive. 2. Decompress the île into the îoppy disk from the following path in the support CD: For LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Driver: \ Drivers\ Intel LSI RAID\ Driver\ makedisk 3. Eject the îoppy disk.
6-4 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.1.2 Installing the RAID controller driver Windows ® 2003 Server OS During Windows ® 2003 Server OS installation T o install the RAID controller driver when installing Windows ® 2003 Server OS: 1. Boot the computer using the Windows ® 2003 Server installation CD. The Windows ® 2003 Server OS Setup starts. 2. Press <F6> when the message âPress F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver ...â appears at the bottom of the screen. 3. When prompted, press <S> to specify an additional device.
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-5 4. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the îoppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. 5. Select the RAID controller driver you need from the list, then press <Enter>. 6. The Windows ® 2003 Setup loads the RAID controller drivers from the RAID driver disk. When prompted, press <Enter> to continue installation. 7. Setup then proceeds with the OS installation. Follow screen instructions to continue. T o an existing Windows ® 2003 Server OS T o install the RAID controller driver on an existing Windows ® 2003 Server OS: 1. Restart the computer , then log in with Administrator privileges. 2. Windows ® automatically detects the RAID controller and displays a New Hardware Found window . Click Cancel . 3. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows ® desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 4. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button to display the list of devices installed in the system.
6-6 Chapter 6: Driver installation 5. Right-click the RAID controller item, then select Properties . 6. Click the Driver tab, then click the Update Driver button. 7. The Upgrade Device Driver Wizard window appears. Click Next . 8. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the îoppy disk drive. 9. Select the option Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) , then click Next . 10. The wizard searches the RAID controller drivers. When found, click Next to install the drivers. 1 1. Click Finish after the driver installation is done. T o verify the RAID controller driver installation: 1. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows ® desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 2. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button. 3. Click the â â sign before the item SCSI and RAID controllers , then the LSI Adapter , SAS 3000 series, 8-port with 1068-StorPort item should appear . The screen differs based on the controller .
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-7 2. At the boot: , type linux dd , then press <Enter>. 4. Right-click the RAID controller driver item, then select Properties from the menu. 5. Click the Driver tab, then click the Driver Details button to display the RAID controller drivers. 6. Click OK when înished. Red Hat ® Enterprise T o install the Intel ® ICH9R LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID controller driver when installing Red Hat ® Enterprise OS: 1. Boot the system from the Red Hat ® Installation CD. When installing a Red Hat 2.4 kernel with a Driver Update Disk (DUD) to a disk drive attached to a LSI HBA, use the command below at the install prompt: linux dd updates.
6-8 Chapter 6: Driver installation 4. Select fd0 using the <T ab> key when asked to select the driver disk source. Press <T ab> to move the cursor to OK , then press <Enter>. 3. Select Y es using the <T ab> key when asked if you have the driver disk. Press <Enter>
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-9 6. Follow screen instructions to continue the OS installation. 5. When prompted, insert the Red Hat ® Enterprise RAID driver disk to the îoppy disk drive, select OK , then press <Enter>. The drivers for the RAID controller are installed to the system.
6-10 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.2 Intel ® chipset device installation This section provides instructions on how to install the Plug and Play components for the Intel ® chipset on the system. Y ou need to manually install the Intel ® chipset software on a Windows Server 2003 operating system. T o install the Intel ® chipset device software: 1. Restart the computer , then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The support CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . 3. Click the item Intel(R) Chipset Device Installation Utility from the menu.
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-1 1 4. The Intel(R) Chipset Device Software window appears. Click Next to start installation. 5. Select Y es to accept the terms of the License Agreement and continue the process.
6-12 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6. Read the Readme File Information and press Next to continue the installation. 7. After completing the installation, click Finish to complete the setup process.
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-13 6.3 LAN driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the Broadcom ® Gigabit LAN controller drivers on a Windows ® Server 2003 OS. T o install the LAN controller drivers: 1. Restart the computer , then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . ⢠Windows ® automatically detects the LAN controllers and displays a New Hardware Found window . Click Cancel to close this window . ⢠If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the île ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double- click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the CD. 3. Click the Broadcom 5721 Driver to begin installation.
6-14 Chapter 6: Driver installation 4. Click Next when the InstallShield Wizard window appears. 5. T oggle I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next to continue.
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-15 6. Click Install to start the installation. 7. Click Finish to exit the wizard when the installation is completed.
6-16 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.4 VGA driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the XGI V olari Z9s Video Graphics Adapter (VGA) driver . 1. Restart the computer , then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The support CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . The Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . 6.4.1 Windows ® Server 2003 Y ou need to manually install the XGI V olari Z9s VGA driver on a Window s ® Server 2003 operating system. T o install the XGI V olari Z9s VGA driver: 3. The XGI VGA Package window appears, preparing the setup.
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-17 5. The system will update the VGA driver . 6. When the installation completes, click Finish to restart your computer before using the program. 4. Click Next to start the installation.
6-18 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.5 Management applications and utilities installation The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, management applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. The contents of the support CD a re subject to cha nge at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for updates. 6.5.1 Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the île ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the CD. 6.5.2 Drivers menu The Drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. The screen display and driver options vary under different operating system versions.
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-19 6.5.3 Management Software menu The Management Software menu displays the available network and server monitoring applications. Click an item to install. 6.5.4 Utilities menu The Utilities menu displays the software applications and utilities that the motherboard supports. Click an item to install. 6.5.5 Contact information Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. Y ou can also înd this information on the inside front cover of this user guide.
6-20 Chapter 6: Driver installation
A Reference information This appendix includes additional information that you may refer to when conîguring the motherboard.
Appendix summary A ASUS DSAN-DX A.1 DSAN-DX model block diagram .................................................. A-1
ASUS DSAN-DX A-1 A.1 DSAN-DX model block diagram 5100MCH (San Clemente) ICH9R 1333 FSB 667 x8 x8 x16 slot x8 slot x8 slot Z9s DDR2x3 x1 5721 x1 5721 x8 x8 x8 ASM 1410 DDR2x3 IT8213F PCI 33 PCI4 PCIE1 PCIE2 x8 slot x8 slot x4 x4 x4 ASM 1410 PCIE6 PCIE3 PIKE IDE 6 x SATA Xeon 5000/5100/5200/5300/5400 Intel MSM (RAID 0, 1, 10, 5) LSI MegaRAID (RAID 0, 1, 10) LSI MegaRAID (RAID 5 with iBTN)
A-2 Appendix A: Reference information
ii E3635 First Edition V1 February 2008 Copyright © 2007 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this ma nual, including the products and soft ware described in i t, may be reproduc ed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (âASUSâ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiîed or altered, unless such rep air , mod iîcation of a lteration i s authorized in writi ng by ASU S; or (2) the ser ial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROV IDES THIS MANUAL âAS ISâ WITHOU T WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EI THER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DI RE C TOR S, O FF IC ER S , E MP L OY EE S O R A G EN TS B E L I AB LE F OR A NY IN DI RE C T , S PE CI AL , INC IDENTAL, OR CON SEQU ENTIA L D AMAGE S ( INCL UDIN G D AMAGE S F OR LOS S O F P ROFI TS, LO SS O F B US IN ES S, L OSS O F US E OR D A TA, IN TE RRU PT IO N O F BU SI NE SS AN D T HE L IK E), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . S P E C I F I C AT I O N S A N D I N F O R M AT I O N C O N TA I N E D I N T H I S M A N U A L A R E F U R N I S H E D F O R INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A C OMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY O R L I AB I L I T Y F O R A N Y E R R O R S O R I N AC C U R A C I E S T H AT M AY A P P E A R I N T H I S M A N U A L , INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Prod ucts and c orporat e n ames app earing i n t his manu al may or ma y n ot be regi stered t rademar ks or copyrights o f the ir re spective companie s, an d are u sed only for identiî cation or explanati on an d to t he ownersâ beneît, without intent to infringe.
iii Contents Notices ........................................................................................................ vii Safety information .................................................................................... viii About this guide ......................................................................................... ix T ypography .................................................................................................. x DSAN-DX speciîcations summary ........................................................... xi Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 Welcome! ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ......................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Serial number label ...................................................................... 1-2 1.4 Special features ............................................................................ 1-2 1.4.1 Product highlights ........................................................... 1-2 1.4.2 Innovative ASUS features ............................................... 1-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.1 Before you proceed ..................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-3 2.2.1 Placement direction ........................................................ 2-3 2.2.2 Screw holes .................................................................... 2-3 2.2.3 Support kits for the motherboard .................................... 2-4 2.2.4 Motherboard layouts ....................................................... 2-7 2.2.5 Layout contents ............................................................... 2-8 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................. 2-10 2.3.1 Installing the CPU ......................................................... 2-10 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan .............................. 2-13 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-15 2.4.1 Overview ....................................................................... 2-15 2.4.2 Memory conîgurations .................................................. 2-15 2.4.3 Memory sparing technology .......................................... 2-17 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM .......................................................... 2-19 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ........................................................ 2-19 2.5 Expansion slots .......................................................................... 2-20 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card ......................................... 2-20 2.5.2 Conîguring an expansion card ..................................... 2-20 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments ................................................... 2-21
iv Contents 2.5.4 PCI Express x16 slot (x16 link) ..................................... 2-22 2.5.5 PCI Express x8 slots (x8 link; x4 link) ........................... 2-22 2.5.6 PCI slot ......................................................................... 2-22 2.5.8 SODIMM socket ........................................................... 2-22 2.5.9 Installing ASUS PIKE RAID card .................................. 2-23 2.5.10 Installing i Button ........................................................... 2-23 2.6 Jumpers ...................................................................................... 2-24 2.7 Connectors ................................................................................. 2-29 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .................................................. 2-29 2.7.2 Internal connectors ....................................................... 2-30 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.1 Starting up for the îrst time ........................................................ 3-1 3.2 T urning off the computer ............................................................. 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function .................................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch .............................. 3-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 4-1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable îoppy disk ....................................... 4-1 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility ................................................................ 4-2 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility ...................................... 4-5 4.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................... 4-6 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen .......................................................... 4-7 4.2.2 Menu bar ......................................................................... 4-7 4.2.3 Navigation keys ............................................................... 4-7 4.2.4 Menu items ..................................................................... 4-8 4.2.5 Sub-menu items .............................................................. 4-8 4.2.6 Conîguration îelds ......................................................... 4-8 4.2.7 Pop-up window ............................................................... 4-8 4.2.8 Scroll bar ......................................................................... 4-8 4.2.9 General help ................................................................... 4-8 4.3 Main menu .................................................................................... 4-9 4.3.1 System T ime [xx:xx:xx] ................................................... 4-9 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] ......................................... 4-9
v Contents 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44 MB 3.5 in.] ................................ 4-9 4.3.4 SA T A1â6; P A T A Master/Slave ....................................... 4-10 4.3.5 IDE Conîguration .......................................................... 4-12 4.3.6 System Information ....................................................... 4-13 4.4 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 4-13 4.4.1 USB Conîguration ........................................................ 4-14 4.4.2 CPU Conîguration ........................................................ 4-15 4.4.3 Chipset .......................................................................... 4-17 4.4.4 Onboard Device Conîguration ...................................... 4-19 4.4.5 PCIPnP ......................................................................... 4-20 4.5 Server menu ............................................................................... 4-21 4.5.1 ASF Support [Enabled] ................................................. 4-21 4.5.2 Remote Access Conîguration ....................................... 4-21 4.6 Power menu ................................................................................ 4-23 4.6.1 ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] ......................................... 4-23 4.6.2 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ....................................... 4-23 4.7 Boot menu .................................................................................. 4-27 4.7.1 Boot Device Priority ...................................................... 4-27 4.7.2 Boot Settings Conîguration .......................................... 4-28 4.7.3 Security ......................................................................... 4-29 4.8 Exit menu .................................................................................... 4-31 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.1 Setting up RAID ............................................................................ 5-1 5.1.1 RAID deînitions .............................................................. 5-1 5.1.2 Installing hard disk drives ................................................ 5-2 5.1.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS ........................................ 5-2 5.1.4 RAID conîguration utilities .............................................. 5-2 5.2 LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility .................................... 5-3 5.2.1 Creating a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set .................................... 5-4 5.2.2 Creating a RAID 10 set ................................................. 5-10 5.2.3 Adding or viewing a RAID conîguration ....................... 5-14 5.2.4 Initializing the logical drives .......................................... 5-17 5.2.5 Rebuilding failed drives ................................................. 5-22 5.2.6 Checking the drives for data consistency ..................... 5-24
vi Contents 5.2.7 Deleting a RAID conîguration ....................................... 5-27 5.2.8 Selecting the boot drive from a RAID set ...................... 5-28 5.2.9 Enabling the WriteCache .............................................. 5-29 5.3 Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility ................. 5-30 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) ...................................... 5-31 5.3.2 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) ...................................... 5-33 5.3.3 Creating a RAID 10 set (Stripe Mirror) ....................... 5-34 5.3.4 Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) ...................................... 5-35 5.3.5 Deleting a RAID set ...................................................... 5-36 5.3.6 Resetting disks to Non-RAID ........................................ 5-37 5.3.7 Exiting the Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager .................... 5-37 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.1 RAID driver installation ............................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk ............................................ 6-1 6.1.2 Installing the RAID controller driver ................................ 6-4 6.2 Intel ® chipset device installation .............................................. 6-10 6.3 LAN driver installation ............................................................... 6-13 6.4 VGA driver installation............................................................... 6-16 6.4.1 Windows ® Server 2003 ................................................. 6-16 6.5 Management applications and utilities installation ................ 6-18 6.5.1 Running the support CD ............................................... 6-18 6.5.2 Drivers menu ................................................................. 6-18 6.5.3 Management Software menu ........................................ 6-19 6.5.4 Utilities menu ................................................................ 6-19 6.5.5 Contact information ....................................................... 6-19 Appendix: Reference information A.1 DSAN-DX model block diagram .................................................. A-1
vii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerâ s instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiîcations to this unit not expressly appro ved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userâs authority to operate this equipment.
viii Safety information Electrical safety ⢠T o prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adapter or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company . ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to îx it by yourself. Contact a qualiîed service technician or your retailer . Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately . ⢠T o avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry . ⢠A void dust, humidity , and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualiîed service technician or your retailer . This symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product (electrical, electronic equipment, and mercury-containing button cell battery) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products.
ix About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and conîguring the motherboard. How this guide is organized This user guide contains the following parts: ⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technologies it supports. ⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠Chapter 3: Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠Chapter 4: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠Chapter 5: RAID conîguration This chapter provides instructions for setting up, creating, and conîguring RAID sets using the available utilities. ⢠Chapter 6: Driver installation This chapter provides instructions for installing the necessary drivers for different system components. ⢠Appendix: Reference information This appendix includes additional information that you may refer to when conîguring the motherboard. Where to înd more information Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1. ASUS websites The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2. Optional documentation Y our product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty îyers, that may have been added by your dealer . These documents are not part of the standard package.
x Conventions used in this guide T o make sure that you perform certain tasks properly , take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. Typography Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater- than sign means that you must press the enclosed key . Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key . <Key1 Key2 Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously , the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl Alt D> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: format A:/S DANGER/W ARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: T ips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORT ANT : Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.
xi DSAN-DX speciî¿cations summary Model Name DSAN-DX Processor / System Bus 2 * Socket LGA771 Quad-Core Intel ® Xeon ® 5400 Series (45nm) Dual-Core Intel ® Xeon ® 5200 Series (45nm) Quad-Core Intel ® Xeon ® 5300 Series Dual-Core Intel ® Xeon ® 5000/5100 Series Dual Core/Quad Core FSB 667/1066/1333 Core Logic Intel ® 5100 Memory Controller Hub (MCH) Intel ® ICH9R Form Factor SSI CEB 1.1 Compliant, 12"x10.5" ASUS Features Smart Fan Smart Fan II Rack Ready (Rack and Pedestal dual use) � ASWM2.0 � PIKE � Flex-E � Memory T otal Slots 6 (2-channel; dual ranks per slot) Capacity Maximum up to 48 GB Memory T ype DDR2 533/667 Reg. ECC Memory Size 512 MB, 1 GB, 2GB, 4GB, 8GB** Expansion Slots (follow SSI Loacation #) T otal PCI/PCI-X/ PCI-E Slots 5 Slot Loacation 1 1 * PCI-E x8 (x4 Link) ( Auto disable if PIKE slot is occupied ) Slot Loacation 3 1 * PCI 32bit/33 MHz Slot Loacation 4 1 * PCI-E x8 ( X8 Link) Slot Loacation 5 1 * PCI-E x8 ( X8 Link) Slot Loacation 6 1 * PCI-E x16 ( x16 Link) (Auto switch to x8 Link if slot 5 is occupied ) Additional Slot 1 1* SO-DIMM socke t for optional ASMB3-SOL Additional Slot 2 1* PIKE Slot for Stroage expansion Storage IDE Controller IT8213F-L Single Channel Bus Master IDE support UltraA T A 33/66/100 SA T A Controller Intel ® ICH9R: 6 SA T A2 300MB/s ports Intel Matrix Storage (for Windows only) (Support software RAID 0, 1, 10 & 5) LSI ® MegaRAID (for Linux/Windows) (Support software RAID 0, 1, 10) Networking LAN 2 * Broadcom ® BCM5721 PCI-E GbE LAN Graphic VGA XGI Z9s PCI Display Controller 32MB ** The 8GB memory modules are not tested yet
xii DSAN-DX speciî¿cations summary *Speciîcations are subject to change without notice. Onboard I/O Connectors Floppy Connector 1 PSU Connector 24-pin A TX power connector 8-pin A TX 12V power connector Management Connector SO-DIMM socket for ASMB3 USB Connectors 2 (support 4 USB ports) (Blue) Fan Header 8 * 4Pin (With PWM control) SMBus 2 Chassis Intruder 1 Front LAN LED 2 Serial Port Header 1 SGPIO connector 3 Rear I/O Connectors External Serial Port 1 External USB Port 2 VGA Port 1 RJ-45 2 PS/2 KB/Mouse 1 Management Solution Software ASWM2.0 Out of Band Remote Management Optional (ASMB3-SOL / ASMB3-iKVM) Monitoring CPU T emperature � F AN RPM � Environment Operation temperature: 10â ~ 35â Non operation temperature: -40â ~ 70â Non operation humidity: 20% ~ 90% ( Non condensing) ⢠LSI ® MegaRAID 5 function is available only when you install ASUS PIKE 1078 RAID card with iBTN. ⢠The onboard IDE connector is designed for ODD only (P A T A).
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
ASUS DSAN-DX Chapter summary 1 1.1 Welcome! ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ......................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Serial number label ...................................................................... 1-2 1.4 Special features ............................................................................ 1-2
ASUS DSAN-DX 1-1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS ® DSAN-DX motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below . 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer . Standard Gift Box Pack Standard Bulk Pack DSAN-DX DSAN-DX Cables SA T A signal cable 6 -- SA T A power cable 3 -- 2-in-1 cable set (IDE FDD cable) 1 -- Accessories IO shield 1 1 CEK spring 2 -- Application CD Support CD 1 1 Documentation User Guide 1 1 Packing Qty . 3pcs per carton 10pcs per carton
1-2 Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.4 Special features 1.4.1 Product highlights Latest processor technology The motherboard comes with two LGA-771 sockets that support Quad/Dual-Core Intel ® Xeon⢠processors with 1333/1066/667 MHz Front Side Bus (FSB). Quad/ Dual-core processors contain four/two physical CPU cores to meet demands for more powerful processing. Intel ® Xeon⢠processors incorporate the Intel ® Hyper-Threading T echnology and Extended Memory 64-bit T echnology (EM64T). The EM64T enables the support for 64-bit operation system, such as 64-bit Windows ® and Linux. Intel ® 5100MCH and Intel ® ICH9R chipset The Intel ® 5100 Memory Controller Hub (MCH) and the Intel ® ICH9R provide the vital interfaces for the motherboard. The MCH provides the processor , dual-channel DDR2 DIMM memory support, and PCI Express interfaces. The Intel ® ICH9R is an I/O controller hub that provides the interface for PCI 2.3, and PCI Express. Intel ® EM64T The motherboard supports Intel ® processors with the Intel ® EM64T (Extended Memory 64 T echnology). The Intel ® EM64T feature allows your computer to run on 64-bit operating systems and access larger amounts of system memory for faster and more efîcient computing. Enhanced Intel SpeedStep ® T echnology (EIST) The Enhanced Intel SpeedStep ® T echnology (EIST) intelligently manages the CPU resources by automatically adjusting the CPU voltage and core frequency depending on the CPU loading and system speed or power requirement. 1.3 Serial number label Before requesting support from the ASUS T echnical Support team, you must take note of the motherboard's serial number containing 12 characters xxM0Axxxxxxx shown as the îgure below . With the correct serial number of the product, ASUS T echnical Support team members can then offer a quicker and satisfying solution to your problems. xxM0Axxxxxxx DSAN-DX Made in China åæ ¼
ASUS DSAN-DX 1-3 PCI Express⢠interface Th e m oth erb oa rd fu lly s up por ts PCI E xp res s, the latest I/O interconnect technology that speeds up the PCI bus. PCI Express features point-to-point serial interconnections between devices and allows higher clockspeeds by carrying data in packets. This high speed interface is software compatible with existing PCI or PCI-X speciîcations. Broadcom 5721 LAN solution The motherboard comes with a dual-port Broadcom 5721 network connection to provide a total solution for your networking needs. Refer to page 2-28 for the location of the LAN ports and section 2.6 Jumpers for details on Gigabit LAN settings. Serial A T A II technology The mothe rboard suppo rts t he Serial ATA II 3 Gb/s technology through ICH9R Serial A T A interfaces. The Serial A T A II speciîcation provides twice the bandwidth of the current Serial A T A products with a host of new features, including Native Command Queuing (NCQ), Power Management (PM) Implementation Algorithm, and Hot Swap. Serial A T A allows thinner , more îexible cables with lower pin count and reduced voltage requirements. USB 2.0 technology The motherboard implements the Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 speciîcation, dramatically increasing the connection speed from the 12 Mbps bandwidth on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. T emperature, fan, and voltage monitoring The CPU temperature is monitored by the W83793G chip to prevent overheating and damage. The system fan rotations per minute (RPM) is monitored for timely failure detection. The chip monitors the voltage levels to ensure stable supply of current for critical components.
1-4 Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.4.2 Innovative ASUS features ASUS Smart Fan II technology The ASUS Smart Fan technology smartly adjusts the fan speeds according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efîcient operation. PIKE (Proprietary I/O Kit Expansion) PIKE is an on-demand upgrade kit for users. This ASUS unique feature enables users to choose their preferred I/O solutions. ASUS provides multiple SAS solutions for different segments and purposes and PIKE saves lots of validation efforts and hardware cost for end users. Moreover , the special patent design offers multiple I/O solutions without occupying the Slot 6 in 1U system. ASUS Flex-E T echnology ASUS Flex-E T echnology allows PCIE slots to automatically switch conîgurations for Graphic Card and Storage Utilization. ASUS Flex-E T echnology of fers two kinds of c onîgur ations , PC I-E x8 Link on b oth Sl ot 5 a nd 6 or PC I-E x1 6 Li nk on the Sl ot 6 . The PCI-E signal of the Slot 6 would switch to x16 Link automatically when the Slot 5 is not occupied. With this îexibility , ASUS Flex-E makes motherboards suitable for both Server and Workstation.
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
ASUS DSAN-DX Chapter summary 2 2.1 Before you proceed ..................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-3 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................. 2-10 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-15 2.5 Expansion slots .......................................................................... 2-20 2.6 Jumpers ...................................................................................... 2-24 2.7 Connectors ................................................................................. 2-29
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-1 2.1 Before you proceed T ake note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity . ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply . Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX Onboard LED SB_PWR ON Standy Power Powered Of f OFF Onboard LED 1. Standby Power LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED. The green LED lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED
2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. CPU W arning LED The red CPU warning LED lights up as a reminder if CPU is not installed or not properly installed in the CPU socket 2. ⢠When installing only one CPU, the CPU has to be installed to CPU2 socket for a better thermal environment. ⢠If the CPU warning LED lights up, the motherboard will not boot. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX CPU warning LED CPU_WARN1 ON CPU2 not present (red) CPU2 present OFF
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-3 DSAN-DX ® 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the conîguration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard îts into it. T o optimize the motherboard features, we highly recommend that you install it in an SSI CEB 1.1 compliant chassis. 2.2.1 Placement direction When installing the motherboard, make sur e that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear p art of the chassis as indicated in the image below . 2.2.2 Screw holes Place seven (7) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. DO NOT overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. Ensure to unplug the chassis power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components! Place this side towards the rear of the chassis
2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2.3 Support kits for the motherboard For additional protection from motherboard breakage due to the weight of the CPU heatsinks, your motherboard pa ckage comes with CEK springs th at you can use as weight support. Install the CEK springs before installing the motherboard. Hook Each CEK spring has four hooks to match the designated holes around the CPU area. We strongly recommend you use SSI CEB 1.1 compliant chassis. Otherwise, the CPU cooler cannot be mounted on the chassis. T o install the CEK spring: 1. Locate the CPU heatsink holes on the motherboard. 2. Position the CEK spring underneath the motherboard, then match the CEK spring hooks to the CPU1 heatsink holes. Heatsink hole Socket for CPU2 Socket for CPU1
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-5 4. Press the lower spring clips inward, then insert to the lower CPU heatsink holes until they snap in place. 5. If you installed a second CPU, repeat steps 2 to 4 to install the CEK spring to the CPU2 heatsink holes. The CEK springs appear as shown when installed. CEK spring screw hole 3. Press the upper spring hooks inward, then insert to the upper CPU heatsink holes until they snap in place.
2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information 6. Before installing the motherboard into the chassis, locate the standoffs that should match the eight (8) CEK spring screw holes. 8. Secure the motherboard with seven (7) screws. Refer to section 2.2.2 Screw holes for illustration. Make sure that the standoffs perfectly match the CEK spring screw holes; otherwise, you can not install the CPU heatsinks properly . Standoffs for CPU1 Standoffs for CPU2 7. Install the motherboard with the external I/O ports toward the chassis rear panel. The CPU sockets should be right on top of their respective standoffs. Socket for CPU2 Socket for CPU1
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-7 2.2.4 Motherboard layouts DSAN-DX model DSAN-DX ® 24.5cm (9.6in) 24.5cm (9.6in) DDR2 DIMM_A3 (64bit, 240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B3 (64bit, 240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64bit, 240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64bit, 240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64bit, 240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64bit, 240-pin module) PCI E 1 HDLED Super I/O IT8213F AMI 8Mb EATX12V1 USB12_L3 KBMS1 USB56 USB34 FLOPPY1 PRI_IDE PANEL1 SGPIO1 SGPIO2 SGPIO3 SAS8 SAS7 SAS6 SAS5 SAS4 SAS3 SAS2 SAS1 AUX_PANEL1 BCM5721 Intel 5100 MCH Intel 82801IR (ICH9R) BCM5721 LAN1 LAN2 Z9s VGA_SW1 LAN_SW2 ASMB3 LAN_SW1 REAR_FAN1 REAR_FAN2 VGA1 COM1 CPU_FAN2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 FRNT_FAN3 FRNT_FAN4 RAID_SEL1 CPU_WARN1 CPUFAN_SEL1 IBTN_SEL1 I_BTN1 COM2 IDE_SW1 CLRTC1 CHAFAN_SEL1 SB_PWR1 BUZZER1 RECOVERY1 PCIE3 PCIE6 PCI4 PCIE2 PIKE1 PIKE2 EATXPWR1 CPU_FAN1 PSUSMB Lithium Cell CMOS Power SATA5 SATA6 SATA3 SATA4 SATA1 SATA2 CPU1 CPU2
2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2.5 Layout contents Slots/Soocket Page 1. CPU sockets 2-10 2. DDR2 DIMM sockets 2-15 3. PCI Express x16 slot (x16 link) 2-22 4. PCI Express x8 slots (x8 link; x4 link) 2-22 5. PCI slot 2-22 6. PIKE slot 2-22 7. SODIMM socket 2-22 Jumpers Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLR TC1) 2-24 2. VGA controller setting (3-pin VGA_SW1) 2-25 3. LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN_SW1, LAN_SW2) 2-25 4. CPU Fan control setting (3-pin CPUF AN_SEL1) 2-26 5. System Fan control setting (3-pin CHAF AN_SEL1) 2-26 6. IDE setting (3-pin IDE_SW1) 2-27 7. Force BIOS recovery setting (3-pin RECOVERY1) 2-27 8. Intel ® ICH9R SA T A port S/W RAID setting (3-pin RAID_SEL1) 2-28 9. iBTN RAID setting (3-pin IBTN_SEL1) 2-28 Rear panel connectors Page 1. PS/2 mouse port (green) 2-29 2. LAN port for iKVM 2-29 3. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 2-29 4. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 2-29 5. Serial (COM1) port 2-29 6. Video Graphics Adapter port 2-29 7. LAN 1 (RJ-45) ports 2-29 8. LAN 2 (RJ-45) ports 2-29
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-9 Internal connectors Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) 2-30 2. Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1, SA T A2, SA T A3, SA T A4, SA T A5, SA T A6) 2-30 3. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1 2-31 4. SAS connectors (7-pin SAS1, SAS2, SAS3, SAS4, SAS5, SAS6, SAS7, SAS8) 2-32 5. Hard disk activity LED connector (4-pin HDLED1) 2-32 6. Serial General P urpose Input/Out put connector (6- 1 pin SGPIO1) 2-33 7. Serial General Purpose Input/Output connectors (6-1 pin SGPIO2/3) 2-33 8. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB34, USB56) 2-34 9. CPU and system fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN1/2, REAR_F AN1/2, FRNT_F AN1/2/3/4) 2-34 10. Serial port connectors (10-1 pin COM2) 2-35 1 1. Power supply SMBus connector (5-pin PSUSMB1) 2-35 12. SSI po wer con nec tor s (2 4-p in AT XPWR 1, 8-pin A TX12V1) 2-36 13. System panel connector (20-1 pin P ANEL1) 2-37 14. Auxiliary panel connector (20-pin AUX_P ANEL1) 2-38
2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.3.1 Installing the CPU T o install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA771 socket designed for the Intel ® Xeon ® Dual/Quad Core processor . ⢠Before installing the CPU, make sure that the socket box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. ⢠When installing only one CPU, the CPU has to be installed to CPU2 socket for a better thermal environment. ⢠Y our boxed Intel ® Xeon ® LGA771 processor package should come with installation instructions for the CPU and heatsink. If the instructions in this section do not match the CPU documentation, follow the latter . ⢠Upon purchase of the motherboard, make sure that the PnP cap is on the socket and the socket contacts are not bent. Contact your retailer immediately if the PnP cap is missing, or if you see any damage to the PnP cap/socket contacts/motherboard components. ASUS will shoulder the cost of repair only if the damage is shipment/transit-related. ⢠Keep the cap after installing the motherboard. ASUS will process Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) requests only if the motherboard comes with the cap on the LGA771 socket. ⢠The product warranty does not cover damage to the socket contacts resulting from incorrect CPU installation/removal, or misplacement/loss/ incorrect removal of the PnP cap. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX CPU LGA771 CPU1 CPU2
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-1 1 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135º angle. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and foreînger to a 100º angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). T o prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU. 5. Position the CPU over the soc ket, making s ure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket. The socket alignment key should ît into the CPU notch. Alignment key Gold triangle mark Load plate A B 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. Retention tab Load lever This side of the socket box should face you. PnP cap A B
2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information Notes on Intel ® Hyper-Threading T echnology ⢠This motherboard supports Intel ® Xeon⢠CPUs in the 771-land package with Hyper-Threading T echnology . ⢠Hyper-Threading T echnology is supported by Intel ® 5000 series CPU only . 5100/5200/5300/5400 series DO NOT support Hyper-Threading. ⢠The amount of CPU threads depends on the OS support. ⢠Hyper-Threading T echnology is supported under Windows ® XP/2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only . Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠In sta llin g W ind ows ® 2003 Server or later version is recommended. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading T echnology , visit Intel ® website ( www .intel.com/info/hyperthreading ). T o use the Hyper-Threading T echnology on this motherboard: 1. Install an Intel ® Xeon⢠CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup (see Chapter 4: BIOS setup). Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading T echnology is set to Enabled. The item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . 3. Reboot the computer . The CPU îts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. A B
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-13 The Intel ® Xeon⢠processors require an Intel certiîed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. When you buy a boxed Intel C PU, the package includes the heatsink, fan, retention brackets, screws, thermal grease, installation manual, and other items that are necessary for CPU installation. 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan ⢠Ensure that you have applied the thermal grease to the top of the CPU before installing the heatsink and fan. ⢠Refer to the installation manual that came with the CPU package for details on heatsink/fan assembly and installation. CPU heatsink (top view) CPU heatsink (bottom view) Heatsink screw T o install the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four screws on the heatsink align with the nuts on the support plate.
2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to install the other heatsink if you have installed a second CPU, then connect the fan cable to the 4-pin connector labeled CPU_F AN1. 2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the four heatsink screws in a diagonal sequence. DO NOT forget to connect the CPU fan cable! Hardware monitoring errors may occur if you fail to plug this connector . 3. Connect the fan cable to the 4-pin connector labeled CPU_F AN2. CPU_F AN2 connector
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-15 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 Overview The motherboard comes with six (6) Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR2 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR DIMM but has a 240-pin footprint compared to the 184-pin DDR DIMM. The îgure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: 2.4.2 Memory conîgurations Y ou may install 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8GB registered ECC DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠For optimum compatibility , we recommend that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor . Refer to the Qualiîed V endors List on the ASUS web site. ⢠The 8GB memory modules are not tested yet. DSAN-DX ® 128 pins 1 12 pins DIMM_B1 DIMM_A1 DIMM_B3 DIMM_A3 DIMM_B2 DIMM_A2 DSAN-DX 240-pin DDR2 DIMM sockets
2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information Rank population DIMM installation reference table ⢠DIMMs in pair means two DIMMs with the same conîguration. ⢠For better performance, same conîguration DIMMs should be installed on the same slot number for each channel. For example, you may install the same type of DIMMs in DIMM_B1, and DIMM_A1. No. of DIMMs Slot/s to use 1 DIMM_B1 or DIMM_A1 2 DIMM_B1, DIMM_A1 4 DIMM_B1, DIMM_A1, DIMM_B2, DIMM_A2 6 DIMM_B1, DIMM_A1, DIMM_B2, DIMM_A2 DIMM_B3, DIMM_A3 DIMM_B1 DIMM_A1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_A2 DIMM_B3 DIMM_A3 MCH
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-17 2.4.3 Memory sparing technology The Intel ® 5100MCH chipset supports the memory paring technology . Refer to the below sections: ⢠Each channel contains its own sparing engine and can be enabled or disabled separately . ⢠This motherboard does not support rank sparing across channels. ⢠The DIMM rank with the largest size will be assigned as spare rank. Data can only be copied from a smaller sized rank to a larger sized one. ⢠A DIMM can contain only one or two ranks. T o support sparing function, a DIMM channel should contain at least two ranks. ⢠When sparing function is enabled, the usable memory size will reduce the size of the spare ranks. Memory Sparing At conîguration time, a DIMM rank is set aside to replace a defective DIMM rank. When the error rate for a failing DIMM rank reaches a pre-determined threshold, the memory sparing function will issue an interrupt and initiate a spare copy . At the completion of the copy , the failing DIMM rank is disabled and the âsparedâ DIMM rank will be used in its place. Refer to section 4.4.2 Chipset and conîgure the options of Channel Rank Sparing or Channel 1 Rank Sparing to enable the memory sparing functions. The default BIOS setting is disabled. The following tables show memory conîgurations with Memory Sparing function in Channel A/B. One DIMM per channel (two ranks) Channel B Channel A DIMM_B1 (1024MB*2 Ranks) DIMM_A1 (1024MB*2 Ranks) Rank 0 (1024 MB) Rank 1 (1024 MB) Rank 0 (1024 MB) Rank 1 (1024 MB) Sparing Memory space 1024 MB 1024 MB T otal Memory 2048 MB
2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information T wo DIMMs per channel Three DIMMs per channel Channel B Channel A DIMM_B1 (512MB*2 Ranks) DIMM_A1 (512MB*2 Ranks) Rank 0 (512 MB) Rank 1 (512 MB) Rank 0 (512 MB) Rank 1 (512 MB) Sparing Memory space 1024 MB 1024 MB DIMM_B2 (1024MB*2 Ranks) DIMM_A2 (1024MB*2 Ranks) Rank 0 (1024 MB) Rank 1 (1024 MB) Rank 0 (1024 MB) Rank 1 (1024 MB) Sparing Memory space 1024 MB 1024 MB T otal Memory 4096 MB Channel B Channel A DIMM_B1 (512MB*2 Ranks) DIMM_B1 (512MB*2 Ranks) Rank 0 (512 MB) Rank 1 (512 MB) Rank 0 (512 MB) Rank 1 (512 MB) Sparing Memory space 1024 MB 1024 MB DIMM_B2 (1024MB*2 Ranks) DIMM_A2 (1024MB*2 Ranks) Rank 0 (1024 MB) Rank 1 (1024 MB) Rank 0 (1024 MB) Rank 1 (1024 MB) Sparing Memory space 2048 MB 2048 MB DIMM_B3 (2048MB*2 Ranks) DIMM_A3 (2048MB*2 Ranks) Rank 0 (2048 MB) Rank 1 (2048 MB) Rank 0 (2048 MB) Rank 1 (2048 MB) Sparing Memory space 2048 MB 2048 MB T otal Memory 10240 MB
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-19 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. T o install a DIMM: 1. Unlo ck a DIM M so cket by pres sing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM T o remove a DIMM: 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it îts in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. Do not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Unlocked retaining clip DDR2 DIMM notch Support the DIMM lightly with your îngers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it îips out with extra force. DDR2 DIMM notch 1 2 3 1 2 1 1
2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card T o install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press îrmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier . 6. Replace the system cover . 2.5.2 Conîguring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, conîgure the it by adjusting the software settings. 1. T urn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any . See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components.
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-21 * These IRQs are usually available for ISA or PCI devices. 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments Standard Interrupt assignments IRQ Priority Standard function 0 1 System T imer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 - Programmable Interrupt 3* 1 1 Communications Port (COM2) 4* 12 Communications Port (COM1) 5* 13 -- 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7* 15 -- 8 3 System CMOS/Real T ime Clock 9* 4 ACPI Mode when used 10* 5 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering 1 1* 6 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering 12* 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14* 9 Primary IDE Channel 15* 10 Secondary IDE Channel
2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5.8 SODIMM socket The SODIMM socket on the motherboard supports an ASUS ® Server Management Board 3 Series (ASMB3). SODIMM socket 2.5.4 PCI Express x16 slot (x16 link) The onboard PCI Express x16 slots provides x16 link to the 5100 MCH. This slot supports VGA cards and various server class high performance add-on cards. The slot switches to x8 link automatically if the slot location 5 is occupied. 2.5.5 PCI Express x8 slots (x8 link; x4 link) The onboard PCI Express x8 slots provide x8 link to the 5100MCH and x4 link to ICH9R. These slots are designed for various server class high performance add- on cards like SCSI RAID card, îber-channel card, etc. The Slot 1 (x4 link) does not function when a PIKE RAID card is installed. 2.5.6 PCI slot The PCI slot supports cards such as a LAN card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI 2.3 speciîcations. 2.5.7 PIKE slot The PIKE slot allows you to choose and change your preferred SAS solution easily . Install an optional ASUS PIKE RAID card based on your needs. PCIEx16 slot (Slot 6) PCI slot PCIEx8 slot (Slot 5; x8 link) PCIEx8 slot (Slot 1; x4 link) PIKE Interface The PIKE Interface is for ASUS PIKE RAID card only . PCIEx8 slot (x8 link)
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-23 2.5.9 Installing ASUS PIKE RAID card Follow the ste ps below to ins tall an option al ASUS RAID card on your moth erboard. 1. Locate the PIKE RAID card slot on the motherboard. 2. Align the golden îngers of the RAID card with the PIKE RAID card slot. 3. Insert the RAID card into the PIKE RAID card slot. Make sure it is completely seated on the PIKE RAID card slot. 2.5.10 Installing i Button Follow the steps below to install an optional i Button on your motherboard. 1. Locate the I Button slot on the motherboard. 2. Snap the I Button in place.
2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLR TC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! 2.6 Jumpers 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) This jumper allows you to clear the Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. Y ou can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and s ystem setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. T o erase the RTC RAM: 1. T urn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Move the jumper cap from pins 1â2 (default) to pins 2â3. Keep the cap on pin s 2â3 for about 5â 10 seconds, then move t he cap back to pi ns 1â2 . 3. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer . 4. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX Clear RTC RAM 2 1 2 3 Normal (Default) Clear CMOS CLRTC1 If the steps above do not help, remove the onboard battery and move the jumper again to clear the CMOS RTC RAM data. After the CMOS clearance, reinstall the battery .
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-25 2. VGA controller setting (3-pin VGA_SW1) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard VGA controller . Set to pins 1â2 to activate the VGA feature. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX VGA setting 2 1 2 3 Enable VGA (Default) Disable VGA_SW1 3. LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN_SW1, LAN_SW2) These jumpers allow you to enable or disable the onboard Broadcom ® BCM5721 Gigabit LAN1/2 controller . Set to pins 1â2 to activate the Gigabit LAN feature. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX LAN setting 2 1 2 3 Enable LAN (Default) Disable LAN_SW2 2 1 2 3 Enable LAN (Default) Disable LAN_SW1
2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information 4. CPU Fan control setting (3-pin CPUF AN_SEL1) This jumper allows you to switch for fan pin selection. The CPUF AN_SEL1 switch for fan pin selection. The CPUF AN_SEL1 jumper is for the CPU fans control. Set to pins 1â2 when using 4-pin fans or pins 2â3 when using 3-pin fans. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX CPUF AN setting 2 1 2 3 4-Pin FAN (Default) 3-Pin FAN CPUFAN_SEL1 ⢠If you use a 4-pin fan but set the jumper to pin 2-3, the fan you installed may not work. ⢠If you use a 3-pin fan but set the jumper for a 4-pin fan, the fan controll will not work and the fan you installed will always run at full speed. 5. System Fan control setting (3-pin CHAF AN_SEL1) This jumper allows you to switch for fan pin selection. The CHAF AN_SEL1 switch for fan pin selection. The CHAF AN_SEL1 jumper is for the system fans control. Set to pins 1â2 when using 4-pin fans or pins 2â3 when using 3-pin fans. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX CHAF AN setting 2 1 2 3 4-Pin FAN (Default) 3-Pin FAN CHAFAN_SEL1 ⢠If you use a 4-pin fan but set the jumper to pin 2 â 3, the fan you installed may not work. ⢠If you use a 3-pin fan but set the jumper for a 4-pin fan, the fan controll will not work and the fan you installed will always run at full speed.
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-27 6. IDE setting (3-pin IDE_SW1) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard IDE connector . . Set to pins 1â2 to activate the IDE connector . DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX IDE setting 2 1 2 3 Enable IDE (Default) Disable IDE_SW1 7. Force BIOS recovery setting (3-pin RECOVER Y1) This jumper allows you to quickly update or recover the BIOS settings when it becomes corrupted. T o update the BIOS: 1. Prepare a îoppy disk that contains the original or latest BIOS for the motherboard (XXXXXX.ROM) and the AFUDOS.EXE utility . 2. Set the jumper to pins 2â3. â3. 3. 3. Insert the îoppy disk then turn on the system to update the BIOS. 4. Shut down the system. 5. Set the jumper back to pins 1â2. â2. 2. 6. T urn on the system. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX BIOS recovery setting 2 1 2 3 Normal (Default) BIOS Recovery RECOVERY1 Use the AFUDOS uitility version 3.12 to îash the BIOS.
2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information 9. iBTN RAID setting (3-pin IBTN_SEL1) This jumper allows you to select the RAID conîguration utility to use when you create disk arrays. Place the jumper caps on pins 1â2 if you install a PIKE RAID card to the motherboard and want to use the LSI Logic MPT LSI Logic MPT Setup Utility (defaul t). Or you can place the jumper caps on pins 2â3 to create (default). Or you c an place the jumper caps on pins 2â3 to create the LSI Mega RAID 5 by supported Intel ® ICH9R SA T A controller . DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX IBTN setting 2 1 2 3 PIKE RAID5 (Default) ICH9R RAID5 IBTN_SEL1 8. Intel ® ICH9R SA T A port S/W RAID setting (3-pin RAID_SEL1) This jumper allows you to select the Serial A T A RAID conîguration utility to use when you create disk arrays. Both utilities are supported by the Intel ® ICH9R. Place the jumper caps on pins 1â2 if you want to use the LSI LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility (default); otherwise, place the jumper (default); otherwise, place the jumper caps on pins 2â3 to use the Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager (IMSM). DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX RAID setting 2 1 2 3 3rd (Default) Intel RAID_SEL1 ⢠LSI Logic MPT Setup Utility is available only when you install a PIKE RAID card. ⢠LSI Mega RAID 5 fucntion is available only when you place the iBTN to I_BTN1 slot and install an optional ASUS PIKE RAID card.
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-29 2.7 Connectors 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors LAN port LED indications LAN port SPEED LED ACT/LINK LED 1. PS/2 mouse port (green) . This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 2. RJ-45 port for iKVM . This RJ- 45 port functions only when y ou install ASMB3/ iKVM management card. 3. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) . This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. 4. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 . These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 5. Serial (COM1) port . This 9-pin communication port is for pointing devices or other serial devices. 6. Video Graphics Adapter port . This port is for a VGA monitor or other VGA- compatible devices. 7. LAN 1 (RJ-45) port . This port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 8. LAN 2 (RJ-45) port . This port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 2 4 6 7 8 5 1 3 Activity/Link LED Speed LED Status Description Status Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection ORANGE Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection
2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1, SA T A2, SA T A3, SA T A4, SA T A5, SA T A6; Black) These connectors, controlled by southbridge ICH9R, are for the Serial A T A signal cables for Serial A T A hard disk drives. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX SA T A connectors SA T A1 GND RSATA_TXP1 RSATA_TXN1 GND RSATA_RXP1 RSATA_RXN1 GND SA T A2 GND RSATA_TXP2 RSATA_TXN2 GND RSATA_RXP2 RSATA_RXN2 GND SA T A3 GND RSATA_TXP3 RSATA_TXN3 GND RSATA_RXP3 RSATA_RXN3 GND SA T A4 GND RSATA_TXP4 RSATA_TXN4 GND RSATA_RXP4 RSATA_RXN4 GND SA T A5 GND RSATA_TXP5 RSATA_TXN5 GND RSATA_RXP5 RSATA_RXN5 GND SA T A6 GND RSATA_TXP6 RSATA_TXN6 GND RSATA_RXP6 RSATA_RXN6 GND 2.7.2 Internal connectors 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) This connector is for the provided îoppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector , then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the îoppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. DSAN-DX ® FLOPPY NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. PIN1 DSAN-DX Floppy disk drive connector
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-31 3. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) This connector is for an Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable. The Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable has three connectors: a blue connector for the primary IDE connector on the motherboard, a black connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE slave device (optical drive/hard disk drive), and a gray connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE master device (hard disk drive). If you install two hard disk drives, you must conîgure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly . Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector . This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE devices. ⢠The onboard IDE connector is designed for ODD only (P A T A). DSAN-DX ® PRI_EIDE1 NOTE: Orient the red markings on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PIN1 DSAN-DX IDE connector
2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information 5. Hard disk activity LED connector (4-pin HDLED1) This connector is used to connect to a hard disk drive active LED connector on the SCSI or RAID card. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX Storage card activity LED connector NC ADD_IN_CARD- ADD_IN_CARD- NC HDLED 4. SAS connectors (7-pin SAS1, SAS2, SAS3, SAS4; Red) (7-pin SAS5, SAS6, SAS7, SAS8; Blue) This motherboard comes with eight (8) Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connectors, the next-generation storage technology that supports both Series SCSI and Serial A T A (SA T A). Each connector supports one device. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX SAS connectors SAS4 GND RSATA_TXP4 RSATA_TXN4 GND RSATA_RXP4 RSATA_RXN4 GND SAS3 GND RSATA_TXP3 RSATA_TXN3 GND RSATA_RXP3 RSATA_RXN3 GND SAS2 GND RSATA_TXP2 RSATA_TXN2 GND RSATA_RXP2 RSATA_RXN2 GND SAS1 GND RSATA_TXP1 RSATA_TXN1 GND RSATA_RXP1 RSATA_RXN1 GND SAS8 GND RSATA_TXP8 RSATA_TXN8 GND RSATA_RXP8 RSATA_RXN8 GND SAS7 GND RSATA_TXP7 RSATA_TXN7 GND RSATA_RXP7 RSATA_RXN7 GND SAS6 GND RSATA_TXP6 RSATA_TXN6 GND RSATA_RXP6 RSATA_RXN6 GND SAS5 GND RSATA_TXP5 RSATA_TXN5 GND RSATA_RXP5 RSATA_RXN5 GND ⢠These connectors function only when you install a PIKE RAID card. ⢠Connect the SAS hard disk drives to SAS connectors 1â4 (blue) when installing a 4-port PIKE RAID card.
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-33 6. Serial General Purpose Input/Output connector (6-1 pin SGPIO1) This connector is used for the SGPIO peripherals for the LSI MegaRAID SA T A LED. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX SGPIO connector SGPIO1 SDATAOUT0 SDATAOUT1 GND SATA_SLOAD SATA_SCLK PIN1 DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX SGPIO2/3 connectors SGPIO3 PIN 1 SIO_DIN SIO_DOUT GND GND GND SIO_END SIO_CLK SGPIO2 PIN 1 SIO_DIN SIO_DOUT GND GND GND SIO_END SIO_CLK 7. Serial General Purpose Input/Output connectors (6-1 pin SGPIO2/3) These connector is used for the SAS chip SIO interface that controls the LED pattern generation, device information and general purpose data. These connectors functions only when you install a PIKE SAS RAID card.
2-34 Chapter 2: Hardware information 8. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB34, USB56) These connectors is for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to the connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 speciîcation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. The USB port module is purchased separately . DSAN-DX ® PIN 1 NC GND USB_P6 USB_P6- USB 5V GND USB_P5 USB_P5- USB 5V USB56 PIN 1 NC GND USB_P4 USB_P4- USB 5V GND USB_P3 USB_P3- USB 5V USB34 DSAN-DX USB 2.0 connectors 9. CPU and system fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN1/2, REAR_F AN1/2, FRNT_F AN1/2/3/4) The fan c onnect ors su pport cooli ng fan s of 3 50 mAâ740 mA (8.88 W max.) or a total of 3.15 Aâ6.66 A (53.28 W max.) at 12V . Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector . DO NOT forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufîcient air îow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! DO NOT place jumper caps on the fan connectors! DSAN-DX ® FRNT_F AN1 PWM Control FAN Speed FAN Power GND CPU_F AN1 GND FAN Power FAN Speed PWM Control CPU_F AN2 GND FAN Power FAN Speed PWM Control FRNT_F AN2 GND FAN Power FAN Speed PWM Control REAR_F AN1 GND FAN Power FAN Speed PWM Control FRNT_F AN3 GND FAN Power FAN Speed PWM Control REAR_F AN2 PWM Control FAN Speed FAN Power GND FRNT_F AN4 GND FAN Power FAN Speed PWM Control CPU_FAN1 REAR_FAN2 CPU_FAN2 FRNT_FAN2 FRNT_FAN3 FRNT_FAN4 FRNT_FAN1 REAR_FAN1 DSAN-DX F AN connectors
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-35 10. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The serial port module is purchased separately . DSAN-DX ® PIN 1 COM2 DSAN-DX Serial port connectors 1 1. Power supply SMBus connector (5-pin PSUSMB1) This connector is for the power supply SMB cable, if your power supply supports the SMBus function. DSAN-DX ® DSAN-DX Power supply SMBus connector 12C_7_CLK# 12C_7_DATA# NC GND 3.3V Remote Sense PSUSMB1
2-36 Chapter 2: Hardware information 12. SSI po wer co nn ec tor s ( 24- pi n ATX PWR 1, 8-pin A TX12V1) These connectors are for SSI power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to ît these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down îrmly until the connectors completely ît. ⢠For a fully conîgured system, we recommend that you use an SSI 12 V -compliant power supply unit (PSU) for LGA771-socket Intel ® Xeon Dual Core processors (Bensley platform). ⢠DO NOT forget to connect the 24 8-pin power plugs; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output i s recommended when con îguring a system with more power consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠Y ou must install a PSU with a higher power rating if you intend to install additional devices. DSAN-DX ® EATXPWR1 3 Volts -12 Volts GND PSON# GND GND GND -5 Volts 5 Volts 5 Volts 5 Volts GND 3 Volts 3 Volts GND 5 Volts GND 5 Volts GND Power OK 5V Standby 12 Volts 12 Volts 3 Volts PIN 1 EATX12V1 12V DC 12V DC 12V DC 12V DC GND GND GND GND PIN 1 DSAN-DX A TX power connectors
ASUS DSAN-DX 2-37 13. System panel connector (20-pin P ANEL1; White) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. 1. System power LED (3-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector . The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power , and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. 2. Message LED (2-pin MLED) This 2-pin connector is for the message LED cable that connects to the front message LED. The message LED is controlled by Hardware monitor to indicate an abnormal event occurance. 3. System warning speaker (4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounte d system warning speaker . The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. 4. Hard disk drive activity LED (2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector . The IDE LED lights up or îashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. 5. A TX power button/soft-off button (2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF . 6. Reset button (2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power . DSAN-DX ® P ANEL1 PIN 1 POWERLED NC POWERLED- MLED MLED- NC 5V GND GND SPKROUT IDELED IDELED- NMIBTN# GND POWERBTN# GND NC RESETBTN# GND DSAN-DX System panel connector
2-38 Chapter 2: Hardware information 14. Auxiliary panel connector (20-pin AUX_P ANEL1, Black) This connector is for additional front panel features including fro nt panel SMB, locator LED and switch, chassis intrusion, and LAN LEDs. 1. Front panel SMB (6-1 pin FPSMB) These leads connect the front panel SMBus cable. 2. LAN activity LED (2-pin LAN1_LED, LAN2_LED) These leads are for Gigabit LAN activity LEDs on the front panel. 3. Chassis intrusion (4-1 pin CHASSIS) These leads are for the intrusion detection feature for chassis with intrusion sensor or microswitch. When you remove any chassis component, the sensor triggers and sends a high-level signal to these leads to record a chassis intrusion event. The default setting is short CASEOPEN and GND pin by jumper cap to disable the function. 4. Locator LED (2-pin LOCA TORLED1 and 2-pin LOCA TORLED2) These leads are for the locator LED1 and LED2 on the front panel. Connect the Locator LED cables to these 2-pin connector . The LEDs will light up when the Locator button is pressed. 5. Locator Button/Swich (2-pin LOCA TORBTN) These leads are for the locator button on the front panel. This button queries the state of the system locator . DSAN-DX ® AUX_P ANEL1 3 1 2 2 4 5 4 PIN 1 NC I2C_4_CLK# GND I2C_4_DATA# 5VSB LAN1_LINK LAN1_ACT LAN2_ACT LAN2_LINK 5VSB CASEOPEN GND LOCATORLED1 LOCATORLED1- LOCATORBTN# GND LOCATORLED2- LOCATORLED2 DSAN-DX Auxiliary panel connector
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, and ways of shutting down the system.
ASUS DSAN-DX Chapter summary 3 3.1 Starting up for the îrst time ........................................................ 3-1 3.2 T urning off the computer ............................................................. 3-2
ASUS DSAN-DX 3-1 3.1 Starting up for the î¿rst time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover . 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector . 5. T urn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. System power 6. After applying power , the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems withA TX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the A TX power button. If your monitor complies with âgreenâ standards or if it has a âpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on self tests or POST . While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps (see BIOS beep codes table below) or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you tu rned on the power , the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. 7. At power on, hold down the <Delete> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4. BIOS Beep Description One short beep VGA detected Quick boot set to disabled No keyboard detected One continuous beep followed by two short beeps then a pause (repeated) No memory detected One continuous beep followed by three short beeps No VGA detected One continuous beep followed by four short beeps Hardware component failure AMI BIOS
3-2 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.2 Turning off the computer 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function If you are using Windows ® 2003: 1. Click the Start button then click Shut Down ... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK button to shut down the computer . 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows ® shuts down. If you are using Windows ® XP: 1. Click the Start button then select T urn Off Computer . 2. Click the T urn Off button to shut down the computer . 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows ® shuts down. 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting.
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
Chapter summary 4 ASUS DSAN-DX 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................... 4-6 4.3 Main menu .................................................................................... 4-9 4.4 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 4-13 4.5 Server menu ............................................................................... 4-21 4.6 Power menu ................................................................................ 4-23 4.7 Boot menu .................................................................................. 4-27 4.8 Exit menu .................................................................................... 4-31
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup: 1. AFUDOS utility (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable îoppy disk.) 2. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 (T o recover the BIOS using a bootable îoppy disk when the BIOS île fails or gets corrupted.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS île to a bootable îoppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities. 4.1.1 Creating a bootable îoppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable îoppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB îoppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows ® XP/2003 environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB îoppy disk to the îoppy disk drive. b. Click Start from the Windows ® desktop, then select My Computer . c. Select the 3 ½ Floppy Drive icon. d. Right click File from the menu, then select Format . A Format 3½ Floppy Disk window appears. e. Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options îeld, then click Start .
4-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS île in DOS environment using a bootable îoppy disk with the updated BIOS île. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS île that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS T o copy the current BIOS île using the AFUDOS utility: ⢠Make sure that the îoppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1024 KB free space to save the île. ⢠Th e s ucc ee di ng B IO S sc re en s ar e f or re fe ren ce o nly. T he a ct ua l BI OS screen displays may not be the same as shown. 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable îoppy disk you created earlier . 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[î¿lename] where the [îlename] is any user-assigned îlename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main îlename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. Main îlename Extension name A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS île. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS île to the îoppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. Reading îash ..... done Write to î¿le...... ok A:\>
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-3 A:\>afudos /i8036A0.ROM AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îash ...... done Writing îash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) The utility veriîes the île, then starts updating the BIOS île. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! Updating the BIOS île T o update the BIOS île using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) and download the latest BIOS île for the motherboard. Save the BIOS île to a bootable îoppy disk. Write the BIOS îlename on a piece of paper . Y ou need to type the exact BIOS îlename at the DOS prompt. 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable îoppy disk you created earlier . 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt, type: afudos /i[î¿lename] where [îlename] is the latest or the original BIOS île on the bootable îoppy disk, then press <Enter>. A:\>afudos /i8036A0.ROM
4-4 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /i8036A0.ROM AM I F irm war e Upd ate Ut ili ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îash ...... done Writing îash ...... done Verifying îash .... done Please restart your computer A:\> Updating the BIOS île using a USB îash drive If you have not purchased a USB îoppy disk drive, you may update the BIOS île using a USB îash drive. Format the USB îash drive to F A T16 or 32 system île before updating the BIOS. T o format the USB îash drive to a F A T32/16 system île: 1. Insert the USB îash drive to an available USB port. 2. From the Windows desktop, click Start , then select My Computer . 3. Right-click the USB îash drive icon, then select Format from the menu. 4. From the File system îeld, select F A T32 or F A T16 , then click the Start button. T o update the BIOS île: 1. Copy the original or the latest BIOS île and the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) to the USB îash drive. 2. Insert the USB îash drive to an available USB port, then place the motherboard support CD to the optical drive. 3. Boot the system from the support CD, then select the FreeDOS command prompt . 4. At the DOS prompt, replace the prompt with the USB îash disk drive letter , then type: afudos /i[î¿lename]. 3. Follow the instructions in the previous section to update the BIOS île.
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-5 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS île when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Y ou can update a corrupted BIOS île using a îoppy disk or a USB îash drive that contains the updated BIOS île. Prepare a îoppy disk or a USB îash drive containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility . Recovering the BIOS from a îoppy disk T o recover the BIOS from a îoppy disk: 1. T urn the system. 2. Insert the îoppy disk with the original or updated BIOS île to the îoppy disk drive. 3. The utility will automatically recover the BIOS. It resets the system when the BIOS recovery înished. Recovering the BIOS from a USB îash drive T o recover the BIOS from a USB îash drive: 1. Remove any îoppy disk from the îoppy disk drive and turn the system. 2. Insert the USB îash drive with the original or updated BIOS île to one USB port on the system. 3. The utility will automatically recover the BIOS. It resets the system when the BIOS recovery înished. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while recovering the BIOS! Doing so would cause system boot failure! The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS île.
4-6 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable Low-Pin Count (LPC) chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS . Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconîguring your system, or prompted to âRun Setup.â This section explains how to conîgure your system using this utility . Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the conîguration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconîgure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the LPC chip. The LPC chip on the motherboard stores the Setup utility . When you start up the computer , the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-T est (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST , restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. Y ou can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the îrst two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The defau lt BIOS se ttings for this mot herboard apply for most cond itions to e ns ur e op ti mu m p er fo rm an ce . If t he sy st em b ec om es u ns ta bl e a ft er cha ngi ng a ny B IOS se tti ngs, lo ad t he d efa ult se tti ngs to en sure s yste m compatibility and stability . Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit Menu. See section 4.8 Exit Menu . ⢠The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only , and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS île for this motherboard.
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-7 v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Date. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.2.2 Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conîguration Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Server For changing the advanced server settings Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) conîguration Boot For changing the system boot conîguration Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings T o select an item on the menu bar , press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4.2.3 Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another . Navigation keys General help Menu bar Sub-menu items Conîguration îelds Menu items System Time [13:44:30] System Date [Tue, 10/11/2007] Legacy Diskette [1.44 MB, 3.5 in.] SATA1 : [Not Detected] SATA2 : [Not Detected] SATA3 : [Not Detected] SATA4 : [Not Detected] SATA5 : [Not Detected] SATA6 : [Not Detected] PATA Master : [Not Detected] PATA Slvae : [Not Detected] IDE Conî¿guration System Information
4-8 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2.4 Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciîc items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power , Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the item has a sub-menu. T o display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4.2.6 Conîguration îelds These îelds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user-conîgurable, you can change the value of the îeld opposite the item. Y ou cannot select an item that is not user-conîgurable. A conîgurable îeld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. T o change the value of a îeld, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to 4.2.7 Pop-up window. 4.2.7 Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conîguration options for that item. 4.2.8 Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not ît on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> /<Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. Main menu items System Time [ 11:17:09] System Date [ Tue 01/22/2008] Legacy Diskette A [1.44 MB 3.5 in.] SATA1 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA2 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA3 [N ot Det ect ed ]] SATA4 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA5 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA6 [N ot Det ect ed ] PATA Master [N ot Det ect ed ] PATA Slave [N ot Det ect ed ] IDE Conî¿guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Date. Scroll bar Pop-up window
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-9 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xx] Allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44 MB 3.5 in.] Sets the type of îoppy drive installed. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [360 KB, 5.25 in.] [1.2 MB, 5.25 in.] [720 KB, 3.5 in.] [1.44 MB, 3.5 in] [2.88 MB, 3.5 in] Refer to section 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Date. System Time [13:44:30] System Date [Tue, 10/11/2007] Legacy Diskette A [1.44 MB, 3.5 in.] SATA1 : [Not Detected] SATA2 : [Not Detected] SATA3 : [Not Detected] SATA4 : [Not Detected] SATA5 : [Not Detected] SATA6 : [Not Detected] PATA Master : [Not Detected] PATA Slvae : [Not Detected] IDE Conî¿guration System Information ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit
4-10 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.4 SA T A1â6; P A T A Master/Slave The BIOS automatically detects the connected IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item, then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, V endor , Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and S.M.A.R.T . monitoring). These values are not user-conîgurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. T ype [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are speciîcally conîguring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (A T API Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP , LS-120, or MO drive. Conîguration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CD/DVD] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-Sector T ransfer) M [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Primary IDE Master Device :Hard Disk Vendor :xxxxxxxxx Size :xx.xGB LBA Mode :Supported Block Mode:16Sectors PIO Mode :4 Async DMA :MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA :Ultra DMA-6 S.M.A.R.T.:Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-Sector Transfer)M [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] S.M.A.R.T. [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Select the type of device connected to the system. The P A T A device is for ODD (optical disk drive) only .
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-1 1 PIO Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the data transfer mode. Conîguration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] DMA Mode [Auto] Sets the DMA mode. Conîguration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] [UDMA3] [UDMA4] [UDMA5] S.M.A.R.T . [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting T echnology . Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data T ransfer [Enabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer . Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main IDE Conî¿guration SATA#1 Conî¿guration [Enhanced] Conî¿gure SATA#1 as [IDE] SATA#2 Conî¿guration [Enhanced] Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.3.5 IDE Conîguration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the conîgurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you wish to conîgure the item. Options Disabled Compatible Enhanced SA T A#1â2 Conîguration [Enhanced] Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Compatible] [Enhanced] Configure SA T A#1 as [IDE] Sets the conîguration for the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge chip. Conîguration options: [IDE] [RAID] [AHCI] If you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10, or the Intel ® Matrix Storage T echnology conîguration from the Serial A T A hard disk drives, set this item to [RAID]. If you want to use the Serial A T A hard disk drives as Parallel A T A physical storage devices, keep the default setting [IDE]. If yo u w ant t he Se ria l AT A h ard di sk d riv es to u se the Ad va nc ed Hos t C on tro lle r In ter fac e ( AH CI ), set t hi s i tem to [ AH CI] . The [AHCI] option allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial A T A features that increases storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled] Disables or enables device write protection. This will be ef fective only if device is accessed through BIOS. Conîguration option: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-13 4.3.6 System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system speciîcations. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main System Information AMIBIOS Version : 0111 Build Date: 01/25/08 Processor Speed : 1866MHz Count : 1 System Memory Usable Size : 2048MB ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. T ake caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect îeld values can cause the system to malfunction. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Exit Conî¿gure the USB support. USB Conî¿guration CPU Conî¿guration Chipset Onboard Devices Conî¿guration PCIPnP ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit AMIBIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information. Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU speciîcation. System Memory Displays the auto-detected system memory .
4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.1 USB Conîguration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîguration options. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced USB Conî¿guration Module Version - 2.24.3-13.4 USB Devices Enabled: None USB Functions [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Enabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit The USB Devices Enabled item shows the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None. USB Functions [Enabled] Allows you to enable the USB host controller . Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following item appears only when you set USB Function to [Enabled]. Legacy USB Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable support for legacy USB devices. Setting to [Auto] allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] The following item appears only when you set USB Function to [Enabled]. USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller to HiSpeed (480Mbps) or FullSpeed (12Mbps). Conîguration options: [FullSpeed] [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Enabled] Enables or disables the BIOS EHCI hand-off support. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Options Disabled Enabled
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-15 v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conî¿gure advanced CPU settings Module Version:3F.06 Manufacturer:Intel Brand String:Intel(R) Xeon(R)2 CPU 5120 Frequency :1.86GHz FSB Speed :1066 MHz Cache L1 :64 KB Cache L2 :4096 KB Ratio Status:Unlocked (Max:07, Min:06) Ratio Actual Value: 7 Ratio CMOS Setting [7] C1E Support [Enabled] Hardware Prefetcher [Enabled] Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Intel(R) Virtualization Tech [Enabled] Execute-Disable Bit Capability [Enabled] Core Multi-Processing [Enabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.4.2 CPU Conîguration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Some items may not appear if you CPU does not support the related functions. Ratio CMOS Setting [7] Whether this item is conîgurable depends on your CPU type. The valid value ranges differently according to your CPU type. If this item is conîgurable, enter the value using the numeric keypad. This item is available only when Intel SpeedStep technology is disabled. C1E Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable C1E support. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hardware Prefetcher [Enabled] Enable this item to use the Hardware Prefetcher Disable Feature. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] *Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch [Enabled] Enable this item to use the Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Disable Feature. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. Note:If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. Intel(R) SpeedStep(tm) tech. [Enabled] Scroll down for more items.
4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Max CPUID V alue Limit [Disabled] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Intel(R) Virtualization T ech [Enabled] The V anderpool Virtualization T echnology allows a hardware platform to run multiple operating systems separately , enabling one system to virtually function as several systems. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Execute-Disable Bit Capability [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the No-Execution Page Protection T echnology . Setting this item to [Disabled] forces the XD feature îag to always return to zero (0). Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Core Multi-Processing [Enabled] Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Intel(R) SpeedStep(tm) tech. [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Intel SpeedStep T echnology . Refer to the Appendix for more information on the Intel SpeedStep T echnology . Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Items above with * mark are for technical personnel to debug only .
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-17 v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Advanced Chipset Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. North Bridge Conî¿guration ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Crystal Beach / DMA [Disabled] MCH Channel Mode [Channel Interleave] Patrol Scrubbing [Enabled] Demand Scrubbing [Enabled] Channel Dependent Sparing [Disabled] Channel 0 [Enabled] Channel Speciî¿c Sparing [Disabled] Rank Interleaving [4:1] Channel 1 [Enabled] Channel Speciî¿c Sparing [Disabled] Rank Interleaving [4:1] Read Completion Coalescing [Auto] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.4.3 Chipset The Chipset conîguration menu allows you to change advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. North Bridge Conîguration The North Bridge Conîguration menu allows you to change the Northbridge settings. Conî¿gure North Bridge features. Crystal Beach / DMA conî¿guration Crystal Beach / DMA [Disabled] Allows you to do the Crystal Beach/DMA conîguration. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] MCH Channel Mode [Channel Interleave] Allows you to select the MCH channel mode. Conîguration options: [Channel Sequencing] [Channel Interleave] [Single Channel 0]
4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Patrol Scrubbing [Enabled] Enables or disables the Patrol Scrubbing. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Demand Scrubbing [Disabled] Enables or disables the Demand Scrubbing. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Channel Dependent Sparing [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disabled the channel-dependent DIMM sparing feature. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Channel 0 [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Channel 0. If you set this item to [Disabled], the following three items will be grayed out. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Channel Speciîc Sparing [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the DIMM sparing feature. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Rank Interleaving [4:1] Allows you to select the Channel 0 Rank Interleave. Conîguration options: [1:1] [2:1] [4:1] Channel 1 [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Channel 1. If you set this item to [Disabled], Channel 0 and the following two items will be grayed out. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Channel Speciîc Sparing [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the DIMM sparing feature. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Rank Interleaving [4:1] Allows you to select the Channel 1 Rank Interleave. Conîguration options: [1:1] [2:1] [4:1] Read Completion Coalescing [Auto] Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto]
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-19 v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conî¿gure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] OnBoard LAN1 Boot ROM [Enabled] OnBoard LAN2 Boot ROM [Enabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.4.4 Onboard Device Conîguration Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Allows you to select the Serial Port2 base address. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Onboard LAN1/2 Boot ROM [Enabled] Allows you to do the LAN Boot ROM conîguration. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Allows BIOS to Enable or Disable Floppy Controller.
4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug & Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.4.5 PCIPnP The PCIPnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. T ake caution when changing the settings of the PCI/PnP Conîguration menu items. Incorrect îeld values can cause the system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS conîgures all the devices in the system. When set to [Y es] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system conîgures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. Conîguration options: [No] [Y es] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register . Conîguration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Y es] When set to [Y es], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Conîguration options: [Y es] [No] Palette Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the pallete snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly . Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] NO: lets the BIOS conî¿gure all the devices in the system. YES: lets the operating system conî¿gure Plug and Play (PnP) devices not required for boot if your system has a Plug and Play operating system.
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-21 4.5.2 Remote Access Conîguration The items in this menu allows you to conîgure the Remote Access features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîguration options. Remote Access [Enabled] Enables or disables the remote access feature. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following items appear only when Remote Access is set to [Enabled]. 4.5 Server menu v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Exit ASF Support [Enabled] Remote Access Conî¿guration ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Server Conî¿gure Remote Access type and parameters Remote Access [Enabled] Serial port number [COM2] Base Address, IRQ [2F8h, 3] Serial Port Mode [115200 8,n,1] Flow Control [None] Redirection After BIOS POST [Disabled] Terminal Type [ANSI] VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support [Enabled] Sredir Memory Display Delay [No Delay] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Conî¿gure Remote Access. Select Remote Access type. 4.5.1 ASF Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASF support. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Serial port number [COM2] Selects the serial port for console redirection. Conîguration options: [COM1] [COM2] Base Address. IRQ [2F8h, 3] This item is not user-conîgurable and changes with the conîguration of Serial port number . Serial port Mode [1 15200 8,n,1] Sets the Serial port mode. Conîguration options: [1 15200 8,n,1] [57600 8,n,1] [38400 8,n,1] [19200 8,n,1] Flow Control [None] Allows you to select the îow control for console redirection. Conîguration options: [None] [Hardware] [Software] Redirection After BIOS POST [Disabled] Sets the redirection mode after the BIOS Power-On Self-T est (POST). Some operating system may not work when set to [Always]. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Boot Loader] [Always] T erminal T ype [ANSI] Allows you to select the target terminal type. Conîguration options: [ANSI] [VT100] [VT -UTF8] VT -UTF8 Combo Key Support [Enabled] Enables or disables the VT -UTF8 combo key support for ANSI or VT100 terminals. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Sredir Memory Display Delay [No Delay] Sets the delay seconds to display memory information. Conîguration options: [No Delay] [Delay 1 Sec] [Delay 2 Sec] [Delay 4 Sec]
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-23 4.6 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the Advanced Power Management (APM). Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîguration options. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Exit ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conî¿guration Hardware Monitor ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Add additional tables as per ACPI 2.0 speciî¿cations. 4.6.1 ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] Speciîes the Advanced Conîguration and Power Interface (ACPI) version supported. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.6.2 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Conîguration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to [Power Off], the system goes into of f state after an AC power loss. When set to [Power On], the system will reboot after an AC power loss. When set to [Last State], the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Conîguration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] This allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Resume On PME [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the system enables the PME to generate a wake event while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Resume On RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake-up event. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On by PME [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit <Enter> to select whether or not to restart the system after AC power loss 4.6.3 APM Conîguration
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-25 v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit TD conî¿guration mode setting 4.6.4 Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor CPU1 :N/A CPU2 :33ºC/91ºF System1 :38ºC/102ºF System2 :35ºC/95ºF CPU Fan1 :N/A CPU Fan2 :1713 RPM FRN FAN1 :N/A FRN FAN2 :N/A FRN FAN3 :N/A FRN FAN4 :N/A REAR FAN1 :N/A REAR FAN2 :N/A FAN Control Mode [SmartFan II Mode] CPU1 TargetTemp Value [ 55] CPU1 TargetTemp Value [ 55] System1 TargetTemp Value [ 55] System2 TargetTemp Value [ 55] CPU1/CPU2 [xxxºC/xxxºF] System1/2 [xxxºC/xxxºF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Ignored] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. The CPU2 T emperature shows N/A if no processor is installed in CPU2 socket. CPU F AN1/2; FRN F AN1/2/3/4; REAR F AN1/2 [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU, front, and rear fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îeld shows N/A. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. VCOREA Voltage :0.096 V VCOREB Voltage :1.328 V Vtt Voltage :1.216 V VSEN1 :1.504 V VSEN2 :1.792 V 3VSEN :3.328 V 12VSEN :12.288 V 5VDD :4.920 V 5VSB :4.944 V VBAT :3.136 V ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Scroll down for more items.
4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup F AN Control Mode [SmartFan II Mode] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Smart Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efîcient system operation. Conîguration options: [SmartFan Mode] [SmartFan II Mode] [Manual Mode] The following items appear only when you set F AN Control Mode to [SmartFan Mode] or [SmartFan II Mode]. CPU1 T argetT emp V alue [ 55] Allows you to set the CPU1 target temperature. Conîguration options: [18]â[85] CPU2 T argetT emp V alue [ 55] Allows you to set the CPU2 target temperature. Conîguration options: [18]â[85] System1 T argetT emp V alue [ 55] Allows you to set the system1 target temperature. Conîguration options: [18]â[80] System2 T argetT emp V alue [ 55] Allows you to set the system2 target temperature. Conîguration options: [18]â[80] The following item appears only when you set the F AN Control Mode to [Manual Mode] F AN Control (%) [100] Allows you to set the fan control ratio. Use the numeric keys to enter or < > <-> keys to change the fan ratio. Conîguration options: [0]â[100] VCOREA, VCOREB, Vtt, VSEN1, VSEN2, 3VSEN, 12VSEN, 5VDD, 5VSB, VBA T The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators. The VCOREB item shows N/A if no processor is installed in CPU2 socket.
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-27 4.7 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. 4.7.1 Boot Device Priority 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [XXXXXXX] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. Conîguration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Exit Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Conî¿guration Security ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server SecuritBoot Exit Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [ATAPI CD-ROM] 3rd Boot Device [Network:MBA v10.0.] 4th Boot Device [Network:MBA v10.0.] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Speciî¿es the Boot Device Priority sequence. A virtual îoppy disk drive (Floppy Drive B: ) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the î¿rst boot device. Speciî¿es the Boot Device Priority sequence. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding type menu.
4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.7.2 Boot Settings Conîguration Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Allows you to set the display mode for Options ROM. Conîguration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Conîguration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] W ait For âF1â If Error [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], the system waits for the <F1> key to be pressed when error occurs. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], the system displays the message âPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST . Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Security Boot Exit Boot Settings Conî¿guration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Enabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system.
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-29 Interrupt 19 Capture [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.7.3 Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîguration options. Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed . After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conîrm the password when prompted. The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. T o change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. T o clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press <Enter>. The message âPassword Uninstalledâ appears. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear it by erasing the CMOS Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM. See section 2.6 Jumper for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Tools Exit Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Password ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Change F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password.
4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Conîguration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility . View Only allows access but does not allow change to any îeld. Limited allows changes only to selected îelds, such as Date and T ime. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the îelds in the Setup utility . Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conîrm the password when prompted. The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully . T o change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility . When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Conîguration options: [Setup] [Always] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Tools Exit Supervisor Password : Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Password Check [Setup] <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password.
ASUS DSAN-DX 4-31 4.8 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Power Boot Exit Save Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. Exit & Save Changes Once you are înished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the PC is turned off. When you select this option, a conîrmation window appears. Select YES to save changes and exit. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to îelds other than System Date, System T ime, and Password, the BIOS asks for a conîrmation before exiting. Discard Changes This option allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a conîrmation appears. Select YES to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Load Setup Defaults This option allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a conîrmation window appears. Select YES to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes or make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM.
4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup
5 RAID conî¿guration This chapter provides instructions for setting up, creating, and conîguring RAID sets using the available utilities.
ASUS DSAN-DX Chapter summary 5 5.1 Setting up RAID ............................................................................ 5-1 5.2 LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility .................................... 5-3 5.3 Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility ................. 5-30
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-1 5.1 Setting up RAID The motherboard comes with the following RAID solutions: ⢠LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility embeded in the Intel ICH9R Southbridge supports Serial A T A hard disk drives and RAID0, RAID1, and RAID10 conîgurations. ⢠Intel Matrix Storage Manager embeded in the Intel ICH9R Southbridge supports Serial A T A hard disk drives and RAID0, RAID1, RAID10, and RAID5 conîguration. 5.1.1 RAID deînitions RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. T wo hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RA ID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conîguration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 10 is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 10 conîguration you get all the beneîts of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 conîgurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 conîguration include better HDD performanc e, fault tolerance, and highe r storage capacity . The RA ID 5 conî guration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and o ther business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy îrst the RAID driver from the support CD to a îoppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive.
5-2 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.1.2 Installing hard disk drives The motherboard supports Serial A T A for RAID set conîguration. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array . T o install the SA T A hard disks for RAID conîguration: 1. Install the SA T A hard disks into the drive bays following the instructions in the system user guide. 2. Connect a SA T A signal cable to the signal connector at the back of each drive and to the SA T A connector on the motherboard. 3. Connect a SA T A power cable to the power connector on each drive . 5.1.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS Y ou must set the RAID item in the BIOS Setup before you can create a RAID set from SA T A hard disk drives attached to the SA T A connectors supported by the Intel ® ICH9R Southbridge chip. T o do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST . 2. Go to the Main Menu > IDE Conîguration , then press <Enter>. 3. Set the SA T A#1 Conîguration item to [Enhanced]. 4. Set the Conîgure SA T A#1 as item to [RAID]. 5. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to Chapter 4 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup. 5.1.4 RAID conîguration utilities Depending on the RAID connectors that you use, you can create a RAID set using the utilities embedded in each RAID controller . For example, use the LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility or the Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager if you installed Serial A T A hard disk drives on the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Intel ® ICH9R Southbridge. Refer to the succeeding sections for details on how to use each RAID conîguration utility .
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-3 3. The utility main window appears. Use the arrow keys to select an option from the Management Menu , then press <En ter>. Refer to the Management Me nu descriptions on the next page. At the bottom of the screen is the legend box. The keys on the legend box allow you to navigate through the setup menu options or execute commands. The keys on the legend box vary according to the menu level. 5.2 LSI Sof tware RAID Conî¿gurati on Uti lity Th e LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility all ows y ou to cr eat e RA ID 0, RA ID 1, or R AID 1 0 set (s) f ro m S ATA ha rd d isk dr iv es co nne cte d to th e S ATA co nne cto rs su pp ort ed by t he mot her bo ar d S out hb ri dge ch ip. T o enter the LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility: 1. T urn on the system after installing all the SA T A hard disk drives. 2. During POST , the LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility automatically detects the installed SA T A hard disk drives and displays any existing RAID set(s). Press <Ctrl> <M> to enter the utility . ⢠The LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utitlity auto conîgures to RAID 1 when the SA T A to RAID Mode is enabled. ⢠The RAID setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen due to the controller version difference. ⢠When you create RAID sets with the LSI Software RAID conîguration utility , the boot priority of the SA T A optical drive has to be manually adjusted. Otherwise, the system will not boot from the connected SA T A ODD. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Conî¿gure VD(s) LSI MegaRAID Software RAID BIOS Version A.01 08131852R LSI SATA RAID Found at PCI Bus No: Dev No:1F Device present at Port 0 HDS722512VLSA80 117800MB Device present at Port 1 HDS722512VLSA80 117800MB Press Ctrl-M or Enter to run LSI Software RAID Setup Utility.
5-4 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.2.1 Creating a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set The LSI Software RAID Conîguration Utility allows you to create a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set using two types of conîgurations: Easy and New . In Easy Conîguration , the logical drive parameters are set automatically inc luding the size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). In New Conîguration , you manually set the logical drive parameters and assign the set size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). Using Easy Conîguration T o create a RAID set using the Easy Conîguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conîgure , then press <Enter>. 2. Us e t he arr ow k eys to s el ect Ea sy Con îgu ra tio n , the n p res s <E nte r>. Menu Description Conîgure Allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1 or RAID 10 set using the Easy Conîguration or the New Conîguration command. This menu also allows you to view , add, or clear RAID conîgurations or select the boot drive Initialize Allows you to initialize the logical drives of a created RAID set Objects Allows you to initialize logical drives or change the logical drive parameters Rebuild Allows you to rebuild failed drives Check Consistency Allows you to check the data consistency of the logical drives of a created RAID set LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Deî¿nes Physical Arrays. An Array Will Automatically Become A VD Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-5 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conîgurable array appears on screen. 3. The ARRA Y SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drives you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y] , where X is the array number , and Y is the drive number . The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-Sel,ENTER-EndArray,F10-Conî¿gure,F2-Drive Info,F3-Logical Drives,F4-HSP Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 0 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU PORT # READY READY 0 1 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-Sel,ENTER-EndArray,F10-Conî¿gure,F2-Drive Info,F3-Logical Drives,F4-HSP Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 1 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU PORT # ONLIN A00-00 ONLIN A00-01 0 1
5-6 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5. Press <F10>, select the conîgurable array , then press <SpaceBar>. Press <F10> again, the logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Cursor Keys, SPACE-(De)Select F2-ChIdInfo F3-SlotInfo F10-Conî¿gure Esc-Quit Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Select Conî¿gurable Array(s) A-0 SPAN-1 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 1 Size = 77247MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Choose RAID Level For This VD
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-7 6. Select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 7. Select the RAID level from the menu, then press <Enter>. Yo u n eed at lea st two i den tica l h ard di sk d riv es whe n c re ati ng a RA ID 1 s et. 8. When creating a RAID 1 set, select DWC from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. When creating a RAID 0 set, proceed to step 10. 9. Select On to enable the Disk Write Cache setting, then press <Enter>. Enabling DWC can improve the performance, but with the risk of data loss. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 1 Size = 77247MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Choose RAID Level For This VD RAID Level RAID 0 RAID 1 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 1 Size = 77247MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Disk Write Cache Setting Of VD Change DWC Off On
5-8 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 10. When înished setting the selected logical drive conîguration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 1 1. Follow steps 5 to 10 to conîgure additional logical drives. 12. When prompted, save the conîguration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu . LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 1 Size = 77247MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Accept This VD Conî¿guration And Go To Next VD LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency Select Yes Or No Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Save Conî¿guration? Yes No
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-9 Using New Conîguration When a RAI D set i s alre ady exi sting, using the New Conîgu ration com mand eras es the existi ng RAI D conîg uratio n data . If you d o not w ant to delete the exis ting R AID set , use the View /Add C onîgura tion com mand t o view or cre ate anot her RA ID conî gurati on. T o create a RAID set using the New Conîguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conîgure , then press <Enter>. 2. Use the arrow keys to select New Conîguration , then press <Enter>. 3. Follow steps 3 to 7 of the previous section. 4. Select Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 5. Key-in the desired logical drive size, then press <Enter>. 6. Follow steps 8 to 13 of the previous section to create the RAID set. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Clear Existing Conî¿guration And Start A New Conî¿guration Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 1 Size = 77247MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Enter VD Size (MB): Enter VD Size (MB): 77247
5-10 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.2.2 Creating a RAID 10 set Y ou can create a RAID 10 set using four identical hard disk drives. T o create a RAID 10 set using the Easy Conîguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conîgure , then press <Enter>. 2. Us e t he arr ow k eys to s el ect Ea sy Con îgu ra tio n , the n p res s <E nte r>. 3. The ARRA Y SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drive(s) you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y ], where X is the array number , and Y is the drive number . The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Deî¿nes Physical Arrays. An Array Will Automatically Become A VD Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-Sel,ENTER-EndArray,F10-Conî¿gure,F2-Drive Info,F3-Logical Drives,F4-HSP Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 0 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU PORT # READY READY READY READY 0 1 2 3
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-1 1 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. The conîgurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conîgurable array , then press <SpaceBar>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-Sel,ENTER-EndArray,F10-Conî¿gure,F2-Drive Info,F3-Logical Drives,F4-HSP Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 1 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU PORT # ONLIN A00-00 ONLIN A00-01 ONLIN A00-02 ONLIN A00-03 0 1 2 3 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Cursor Keys, SPACE-(De)Select F2-ChIdInfo F3-SlotInfo F10-Conî¿gure Esc-Quit Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Select Conî¿gurable Array(s) A-0 SPAN-1
5-12 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration Press <F10> again, the logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters. 6. Select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 7. Select RAID 10 from the menu, then press <Enter>. Yo u ne ed a t le as t fo ur i de nti ca l ha rd d is k dr iv es w he n cr ea ti ng a R AID 1 0 se t. 8. Select DWC from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 9. Select On to enable the Disk Write Cache setting, then press <Enter>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 0 308988MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 0 Size = 308988MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Choose RAID Level For This VD RAID = 0 RAID 5 RAID 10 RAID Level LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 O NLIN A00-03 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 308988MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 1 Size = 154494MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Disk Write Cache Setting Of VD Change DWC Off On
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-13 10. When înished setting the selected logical drive conîguration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 1 1. When prompted, save the conîguration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu . LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 O NLIN A00-03 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 308988MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 0 RAID = 10 Size = 308988MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Accept This VD Conî¿guration And Go To Next VD LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency Select Yes Or No Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 308988MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Save Conî¿guration? Yes No
5-14 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.2.3 Adding or viewing a RAID conîguration Y ou can add a new RAID conîguration or view an existing conîguration using the View/Add Conîguration command. Adding a new RAID conîguration T o add a new RAID conîguration: 1. Fro m the Man agemen t Menu , h ighlig ht Con îgure , t hen pr ess <E nter>. 2. Use the arrow keys to select View/Add Conîguration , then press <Enter>. 3. The ARRA Y SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drive(s) you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y] , where X is the array number , and Y is the drive number . The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency View/Add to The Existing Conî¿guration Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-Sel,ENTER-EndArray,F10-Conî¿gure,F2-Drive Info,F3-Logical Drives,F4-HSP Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 0 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU PORT # READY READY 0 1
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-15 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conîgurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conîgurable array , then press <SpaceBar>. 6. Press <F10> again, and select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-Sel,ENTER-EndArray,F10-Conî¿gure,F2-Drive Info,F3-Logical Drives,F4-HSP Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 3 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU PORT # ONLIN A00-00 ONLIN A00-01 ONLIN A01-00 ONLIN A01-01 0 1 2 3 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Cursor Keys, SPACE-(De)Select F2-ChIdInfo F3-SlotInfo F10-Conî¿gure Esc-Quit Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 View/Add Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Select Conî¿gurable Array(s) A-0 SPAN-1
5-16 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 8. Follow steps 8 to 12 of the Creating a RAID set: Using Easy Conîguration section. 9. When prompted, save the conîguration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu . 10. Follow steps 8 to 13 of the Creating a RAID set: Using Easy Conîguration section to add the new RAID conîguration. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Managem ent Menu Conî¿gure Initializ e Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency PORT # D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 0 D N L I N A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Easy Conî¿guration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 0 154494MB 2 64 KB ONLINE 0 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drive 1 RAID = 1 Size = 77247MB DWC = Off RA = On Accept SPAN = NO Choose RAID Level For This VD RAID Level RAID 0 RAID 1 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys To Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency Select Yes Or No Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 0 154494MB 2 64 KB ONLINE 1 1 77247MB 2 64 KB ONLINE Save Conî¿guration? Yes No 7. Select the RAID level from the menu, then press <Enter>.
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-17 5.2.4 Initializing the logical drives After creating the RAID set(s), you must initialize the logical drives. Y ou may initialize the logical drives of a RAID set(s) using the Initialize or Objects command on the Management Menu . Using the Initialize command T o initialize the logical drive using the Initialize command: 1. From the Management Menu , highlight Initialize , then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to initialize. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <Enter>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Initialize Logical Drive(s) LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select, F10-Check Consistency Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Select VD Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 154494MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drives Loical Drive 0
5-18 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 3. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Y es from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. Y ou may also press <F10> to initialize the drive without conîrmation. Initializing a logical drive(s) erases all data on the drive. 4. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select, F10-Check Consistency Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 154494MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drives Loical Drive 0 Initialize? Yes No Initilize Will Destroy Data On Selected VD(s) LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select, F10-Initialize Management Menu Conî¿gure Initiali ze Objects Rebuild Check Co nsistency Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 154494MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logica l Drives Loical Drive 0 Initialization Of LD Is In Process LD 0 Initialization. Press Esc to Abort. ¦ 85 % Completed
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-19 5. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>. Using the Objects command T o initialize the logical drives using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu , highlight Objects , then press <Enter>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select, F10-Initialize Management Menu Conî¿gure Initiali ze Objects Rebuild Check Co nsistency Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 154494MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logica l Drives Loical Drive 0 Initialization Of LD Is In Process LD 0 Initialization Complete. Press Esc.. ¦ 100 % Completed LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Conî¿gure Objects Like Adapter Parameters
5-20 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 2. Select Virtual Drive from the Objects sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 3. Select the logical drive to initialize from the Virtual Drives sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 4. Select Initialize from the pop-up menu, then press <Enter> to start initialization. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Change VD Parameters Objects Adapter Virtual Drive Physical Drive LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Press ENTER To Select A VD, <DEL> To Delete A VD Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Select VD Obj ects Adapter Virtual Drive Physical Drive Vitual Drive(1) Logical Drive 0 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Initilize VD Obj ects Adapter Virtual Drive Physical Drive Vitual Drive(1) Logical Drive 0 Initialze Check Consistency View/Update Parameters Vitual Drive(0)
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-21 5. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Y es from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. 6. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization. 7. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Initilize Will Destroy Data On Selected VD(s) Obj ects Adapter Virtual Drive Physical Drive Vitual Drive(1) Logical Drive 0 Initialze Check Consistency View/Updat e Parameters Vitual Drive(0) Initialize? Yes No LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency Obj ects Adapter Virtual Drive Physical Drive Vitual Drive(1) Logical Drive 0 Initialze Check Consistency View/Update Parameters Vitual Drive(0) Initialize? Yes No Initilization Of VD Is In Process VD 0 Initialization. Press Esc to Abort. ¦ 55 % Completed LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Con sistency Obj ects Adapter Virtual Drive Physical Drive Vitual Drive(1) Logical Drive 0 Initialze Check Consistency View/Update Parameters Vitual Drive(0) Initialize? Yes No Initialization Of VD Is In Process VD 0 Initialization Complete. Press Esc.. ¦ 100 % Completed
5-22 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.2.5 Rebuilding failed drives Y ou can manually rebuild failed hard disk drives using the Rebuild command in the Management Menu. T o rebuild a failed hard disk drive: 1. From the Management Menu , highlight Rebuild , then press <Enter>. 2. The PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drive you want to rebuild, then press <SpaceBar>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Rebuild PD(s) LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-Sel,ENTER-EndArray,F10-Conî¿gure,F2-Drive Info,F3-Logical Drives,F4-HSP Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 1 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A REBUILD - PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU PORT # ONLIN A00-00 FAIL A00-01 0 1
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-23 3. After selectin g the drive to rebuild, press <F10>. The indicator for the sele cted drive now shows RBLD . 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to rebuild the drive. 5. When rebuild is complete, press any key to continue. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select,F10-Start Rebuild,F2-Drive Information,F3-View Logical Drives Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consist ency Port # 1 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A REBUILD - PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU PORT # ONLIN A00-00 RBLD A00-01 0 1 LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select,F10-Start Rebuild,F2-Drive Information,F3-View Logical Drives Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Port # 1 DISK 77247MB HDS728080PLA380 PF20A60A REBUILD - PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU PORT # ONLIN A00-00 R B L D A 0 0 - 0 1 0 1 Rebuilding Of Drive Will Take A Few Minutes. Start Rebuilding Drive (Y/N)?
5-24 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.2.6 Checking the drives for data consistency Y ou can check and verify the accuracy of data redundancy in the selected logical drive. The utility can automatically detect and/or detect and correct any dif ferences in data redundancy depending on the selected option in the Objects > Adapter menu. The Check Consistency command is available only for logical drives included in a RAID 1 set. Using the Check Consistency T o check data consistency using the Check Consistency command: 1. From the Management Menu , select Check Consistency , then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to check. Press the <Spacebar> to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <F10>. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency CC Of VD(s) LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select, F10-Check Consistency Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Select VD Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 154494MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drives Loical Drive 0
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-25 3. When prompted, use the arrow keys to select Y es from the Consistency Check dialog box, then press <Enter>. Y ou may also press <F10> to check the drive consistency . A progress bar appears on screen. 4. While checking the disk consistency , press <Esc> to display the following options. ⢠Stop - Stops the consistency check. The utility stores the percentage of disk checked, When you restart checking, it continues from the last percentage completed rather than from zero percent. ⢠Continue - Continues the consistency check. ⢠Abort - Aborts the consistency check. When you restart checking, it continues from zero percent. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select, F10-Check Consistency Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 154494MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logical Drives Loical Drive 0 Consistency Check? Yes No Select VD LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 SPACE-(De)Select, F10-Check Consistency Management Menu Conî¿gure Initiali ze Objects Rebuild Check Co nsistency Logical Drive(s) Conî¿gured LD RAID Size #Stripes StripSz Status 0 10 154494MB 4 64 KB ONLINE Logica l Drives Loical Drive 0 CC Under Process VD 0 Consistency Check. Press Esc to Abort. ¦ 85 % Completed The Data On The Drives Is Inconsistency. Repair Done!
5-26 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration Using the Objects command T o check data consistency using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu , select Objects , then select Logical Drive from the menu. 2. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive you want to check, then press <Enter>. 3. Select Check Consistency from the pop-up menu, then press <Enter>. 4. When prompted, use the arrow keys to select Y es from the dialog box to check the drive. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue.
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-27 5.2.7 Deleting a RAID conîguration T o delete a RAID conîguration: 1. From the Management Menu , select Conîgure > Clear Conîguration , then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, use the arrow keys to select Y es from the Clear Conîguration? dialog box, then press <Enter>. The utility clears the current array . 3. Press any key to continue. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Clear Existing Conî¿guration Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Clear Existing Conî¿guration Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/A dd Co nî¿gura tion Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive Clear Conî¿guration? Yes No
5-28 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.2.8 Selecting the boot drive from a RAID set Y ou must have created a new RAID conîguration before you can select the boot drive from a RAID set. Refer to the Creating a RAID set: Using New Conîguration section for details. T o select the boot drive from a RAID set: 1. From the Management Menu , select Conîgure > Select Boot Drive , then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, use the arrow keys to select the bootable logical drive from the list, then press <Enter>. 3. The logical drive is selected as boot drive. Press any key to continue. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Select A Boot VD Conî¿guration Menu Easy Conî¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Select A Boot VD Conî¿gu ration Menu Easy Con î¿guration New Conî¿guration View/Add Conî¿guration Clear Conî¿guration Select Boot Drive Bootable VDs(1):Current Boot VD(0) Boot Drive 0
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-29 5.2.9 Enabling the WriteCache Y ou may enable the RAID controllerâs WriteCache option to improve the data transmission performance. Wh en you ena ble Wr ite Cach e , you may lo se dat a w he n a pow er int err upti on oc cur s wh ile tr ans mit ti ng or e xch ang ing dat a a mon g t he dr ive s. T o enable WriteCache: 1. From the Management Menu , select Objects > Adapter , then press <Enter> to display the adapter properties. 2. Select WriteCache , then press <Enter> to turn the option On (enabled). 3. When înished, press any key to continue. LSI Logic Software RAID Conî¿guration Utility Ver A.51 Aug 13, 2007 Use Cursor Keys to Navigate Between Items And Press Enter To Select An Option Management Menu Conî¿gure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Disk Write Cache - Off(Write Through) or On(Write Back) Objec ts Adapter Virtual Driv e Physical Dri ve Adapter 0 Rebuild Rate = 30 Chk Const Rate = 30 FGI Rate = 30 BGI Rate = 30 Disk WC = Off Read Ahead = On Bios State = Enable Stop On Error = No Fast Init = Enable Auto Rebuild = On Auto Resume = Enable Disk Coercion = 1GB Factory Default
5-30 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.3 Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility The Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, and RAID 5 set(s) from Serial A T A hard disk drives. T o enter the Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility: 1. T urn on the system after installing all Serial A T A hard disk drives. 2. During POST , press <Ctrl I> to display the utility main menu. The navigation keys at the bottom of the screen allow you to move through the menus and select the menu options. The RAID setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen due to the controller version difference. In te l(R ) Mat ri x St or age M ana ge r O pt io n RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R w RAI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None deî¿ned. Physical Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status(Vol ID) 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk [ ââ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu The utility supports maxium four hard disk drives for RAID conîgurration.
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-31 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) T o create a RAID 0 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level , press the up/down a rrow key to select RAID 0 (Stripe) , then press <Enter>. 4. Highlight the Disks item, then press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives you want to include in the RAID set. The SELECT DISKS screen appears. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight a drive, then press <Spacebar> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection. In te l(R ) Mat ri x St or age M ana ge r O pt io n RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R w RAI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a s tr i ng be t we en 1 a nd 16 ch a ra ct e rs in le n gt h t ha t c a n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume0 RAID0(Stripe) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ SELECT DISKS ] [ ââ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. [ ââ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu
5-32 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 6. Use the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 0 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 128 KB. A lower stripe size is recommended for server systems. A higher stripe size is recommended for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Highlight the Capacity item, enter the desired RAID volume capacity , then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 8. When the Create V olume item is highlighted, press <Enter>. A warning message appears. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu, or <N> to go back to the Create Array menu.
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-33 5.3.2 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) T o create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. In te l(R ) Mat ri x St or age M ana ge r O pt io n RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R w RAI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a s tr i ng be t we en 1 a nd 16 ch a ra ct e rs in le n gt h t ha t c a n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A 0.0 GB Create Volume [ ââ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu 2. Enter a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level , press the up /down arrow key to select RAID 1 (Mirror ) , then press <Enter>. 4. Follow steps 4 to 5 and 7 to 9 of the previous section to create the RAID 1 set.
5-34 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.3.3 Creating a RAID 10 set (Stripe Mirror) T o create a RAID 10 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. In te l(R ) Mat ri x St or age M ana ge r O pt io n RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R w RAI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a s tr i ng be t we en 1 a nd 16 ch a ra ct e rs in le n gt h t ha t c a n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID10(RAID0 1) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ ââ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu 2. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level , press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 10 (RAID0 1) , then press <Enter>. 4. Follow steps 4 to 9 of section 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) to create the RAID 10 set.
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-35 5.3.4 Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) T o create a RAID 5 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. In te l(R ) Mat ri x St or age M ana ge r O pt io n RO M v5.6.2.1002 ESB2 w RAI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a s tr i ng be t we en 1 a nd 16 ch a ra ct e rs in le n gt h t ha t c a n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID5(Parity) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ ââ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu 2. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level , press the up/down arrow key to select RAID5 , then press <Enter>. 4. Follow steps 4 to 9 of section 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) to create the RAID 5 set.
5-36 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration 5.3.5 Deleting a RAID set T ake caution when deleting a RAID set. Y ou will lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID set. T o delete a RAID set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 2. Delete RAID V olume , then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to select the RAID set you want to delete, then press <Del>. This window appears. 3. Press <Y> to delete the RAID set and return to the utility main menu; otherwise, press <N> to return to the Delete V olume menu. ALL DATA IN THE VOLUME WILL BE LOST! A re y o u s ur e y o u w an t t o d el e te vo l um e â Vo l um e Xâ ? ( Y /N ): [ DELETE VOLUME VERIFICATION ] In te l(R ) Mat ri x St or age M ana ge r O pt io n RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R w RAI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ DELETE VOLUME MENU ] Name Level Drives Capacity Status Bootable Volume0 RAIDX(xxxxx) X XXX.XGB Normal Yes [ HELP ] D e l e t i n g a v o l u m e w i l l d e s t r o y t h e v o l u m e d a t a o n t h e d r i v e ( s ) a n d c a u s e a n y m e m b e r d i s k s t o b e c o m e a v a i l a b l e a s n o n - R A I D d i s k s . W A R N I N G : EXISTING DATA WITHIN THIS VOLUME WILL BE LOST AND NON-RECOVERABLE. [ ââ ]-Select [<ESC>]-Previous Menu [<Del>]-Delete Volume
ASUS DSAN-DX 5-37 5.3.7 Exiting the Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager T o exit the utility: 1. From the utility main menu, select 4. Exit , then press <Enter>. This window appears. Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N): [ CONFIRM EXIT ] 2. Press <Y> to exit or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. 5.3.6 Resetting disks to Non-RAID Take cauti on befo re you reset a RAID volum e hard disk drive to non-RAID. Resetting a RAID volume hard disk drive deletes all internal RAID structure on the drive. T o reset a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. From the utility main menu, select 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID , then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the RAID set drive you want to reset, then press <Spacebar> to select. 3. Press <Enter> to reset the RAID set drive. A conîrmation message appears. 4. Press <Y> to reset the drive or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. 5. Follow steps 2 to 4 to select and reset other RAID set drives. [ RESET RAID DATA ] Re sett ing RAI D data wil l r emov e in ter na l RA ID s tru ct ures from the selected RAID disks. By removing the se structures, the drive will revert back to a non-RAID disk. WARNING: Resetting a disk causes all data on the disk to be lost. Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk Select the disks that should be reset. [ ââ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete
5-38 Chapter 5: RAID conîguration
6 Driver installation This chapter provides instructions for installing the necessary drivers for different system components.
ASUS DSAN-DX Chapter summary 6 6.1 RAID driver installation ............................................................... 6-1 6.2 Intel chipset device installation ................................................ 6-10 6.3 LAN driver installation ............................................................... 6-13 6.4 VGA driver installation............................................................... 6-16 6.5 Management application and utilities installation .................. 6-18
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-1 6.1 RAID driver installation After creating the RAID sets for your server system, you are now ready to install an operating system to the independent hard disk drive or bootable array . This part provides instructions on how to install the RAID controller drivers during OS installation. 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk Y ou may have to use another system to create the RAID driver disk from the system/motherboard support CD or from the Internet. If you have created RAID sets with the LSI Software RAID conîguration utility , the boot priority of the SA T A optical disk drive has to be manually adjusted. Otherwise, the system will not boot from the connected SA T A ODD. A îoppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows ® 2003 or Red Hat ® Enterprise operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. Y ou can create a RAID driver disk in DOS (using the Makedisk application in the support CD). T o create a RAID driver disk in DOS environment: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Restart the computer , then enter the BIOS Setup. 3. Select the optical drive as the îrst boot priority to boot from the support CD. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. 4. Restart the computer . 5. Press any key when prompted to boot from CD. The Makedisk menu appears. Loading FreeDOS FAT KERNEL GO! Press any key to boot from CDROM... Create Driver Diskette Menu ICH9R INTEL RAID Driver ITE IT8213F Linux Driver Broadcom ASF Firmware Update FreeDOS command prompt 6. Use the arrow keys to select the type of RAID driver disk you want to ceate and press <Enter> to enter the sub-menu.
6-2 Chapter 6: Driver installation INTEL 6321 MATRIX STORAGE MANAGER Driver Windows 32 bit Windows 64 bit Back Exit ICH9R INTEL RAID Driver ITE IT8213F Linux Driver 7. Locate the RAID driver and place a blank, high-density îoppy disk to the îoppy disk drive. 8. Press <Enter>. 9. Follow screen instructions to create the driver disk. ITE IT8213F Linux Driver RHEL AS4 UP5 32/64 bit RHEL AS4 UP6 32/64 bit RHEL 5 32/64 bit RHEL 5 UP1 32/64 bit Back Exit
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-3 T o create a RAID driver disk in Windows ® 2003 Server environment: 1. Restart the system from the hard disk drive, then place the system/ motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Browse the contents of the support CD to locate the driver disk utility . The Windows 32-bit OS RAID driver disk for the Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager is located in: \ Drivers\ ICH9R Intel RAID\Driver\makedisk\win32\f6îpy32.exe The Windows 2003 64-bit OS RAID driver disk for the Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager is located in: \ Drivers\ ICH9R Intel RAID\Driver\makedisk\win32\f6îpy64.exe 3. Insert a formatted high-density îoppy disk to the îoppy disk drive. 4. Follow screen instructions to complete the process. 5. After creating a RAID driver disk, eject the îoppy disk, then write-protect it to prevent computer virus infection. T o create a RAID driver disk in Red Hat ® Enterprise Linux server environment: 1. Insert a blank formatted high-density îoppy disk to the îoppy disk drive. 2. Decompress the île into the îoppy disk from the following path in the support CD: For LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Driver: \ Drivers\ Intel LSI RAID\ Driver\ makedisk 3. Eject the îoppy disk.
6-4 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.1.2 Installing the RAID controller driver Windows ® 2003 Server OS During Windows ® 2003 Server OS installation T o install the RAID controller driver when installing Windows ® 2003 Server OS: 1. Boot the computer using the Windows ® 2003 Server installation CD. The Windows ® 2003 Server OS Setup starts. 2. Press <F6> when the message âPress F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver ...â appears at the bottom of the screen. 3. When prompted, press <S> to specify an additional device.
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-5 4. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the îoppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. 5. Select the RAID controller driver you need from the list, then press <Enter>. 6. The Windows ® 2003 Setup loads the RAID controller drivers from the RAID driver disk. When prompted, press <Enter> to continue installation. 7. Setup then proceeds with the OS installation. Follow screen instructions to continue. T o an existing Windows ® 2003 Server OS T o install the RAID controller driver on an existing Windows ® 2003 Server OS: 1. Restart the computer , then log in with Administrator privileges. 2. Windows ® automatically detects the RAID controller and displays a New Hardware Found window . Click Cancel . 3. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows ® desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 4. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button to display the list of devices installed in the system.
6-6 Chapter 6: Driver installation 5. Right-click the RAID controller item, then select Properties . 6. Click the Driver tab, then click the Update Driver button. 7. The Upgrade Device Driver Wizard window appears. Click Next . 8. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the îoppy disk drive. 9. Select the option Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) , then click Next . 10. The wizard searches the RAID controller drivers. When found, click Next to install the drivers. 1 1. Click Finish after the driver installation is done. T o verify the RAID controller driver installation: 1. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows ® desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 2. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button. 3. Click the â â sign before the item SCSI and RAID controllers , then the LSI Adapter , SAS 3000 series, 8-port with 1068-StorPort item should appear . The screen differs based on the controller .
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-7 2. At the boot: , type linux dd , then press <Enter>. 4. Right-click the RAID controller driver item, then select Properties from the menu. 5. Click the Driver tab, then click the Driver Details button to display the RAID controller drivers. 6. Click OK when înished. Red Hat ® Enterprise T o install the Intel ® ICH9R LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID controller driver when installing Red Hat ® Enterprise OS: 1. Boot the system from the Red Hat ® Installation CD. When installing a Red Hat 2.4 kernel with a Driver Update Disk (DUD) to a disk drive attached to a LSI HBA, use the command below at the install prompt: linux dd updates.
6-8 Chapter 6: Driver installation 4. Select fd0 using the <T ab> key when asked to select the driver disk source. Press <T ab> to move the cursor to OK , then press <Enter>. 3. Select Y es using the <T ab> key when asked if you have the driver disk. Press <Enter>
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-9 6. Follow screen instructions to continue the OS installation. 5. When prompted, insert the Red Hat ® Enterprise RAID driver disk to the îoppy disk drive, select OK , then press <Enter>. The drivers for the RAID controller are installed to the system.
6-10 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.2 Intel ® chipset device installation This section provides instructions on how to install the Plug and Play components for the Intel ® chipset on the system. Y ou need to manually install the Intel ® chipset software on a Windows Server 2003 operating system. T o install the Intel ® chipset device software: 1. Restart the computer , then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The support CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . 3. Click the item Intel(R) Chipset Device Installation Utility from the menu.
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-1 1 4. The Intel(R) Chipset Device Software window appears. Click Next to start installation. 5. Select Y es to accept the terms of the License Agreement and continue the process.
6-12 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6. Read the Readme File Information and press Next to continue the installation. 7. After completing the installation, click Finish to complete the setup process.
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-13 6.3 LAN driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the Broadcom ® Gigabit LAN controller drivers on a Windows ® Server 2003 OS. T o install the LAN controller drivers: 1. Restart the computer , then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . ⢠Windows ® automatically detects the LAN controllers and displays a New Hardware Found window . Click Cancel to close this window . ⢠If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the île ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double- click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the CD. 3. Click the Broadcom 5721 Driver to begin installation.
6-14 Chapter 6: Driver installation 4. Click Next when the InstallShield Wizard window appears. 5. T oggle I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next to continue.
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-15 6. Click Install to start the installation. 7. Click Finish to exit the wizard when the installation is completed.
6-16 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.4 VGA driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the XGI V olari Z9s Video Graphics Adapter (VGA) driver . 1. Restart the computer , then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The support CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . The Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . 6.4.1 Windows ® Server 2003 Y ou need to manually install the XGI V olari Z9s VGA driver on a Window s ® Server 2003 operating system. T o install the XGI V olari Z9s VGA driver: 3. The XGI VGA Package window appears, preparing the setup.
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-17 5. The system will update the VGA driver . 6. When the installation completes, click Finish to restart your computer before using the program. 4. Click Next to start the installation.
6-18 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.5 Management applications and utilities installation The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, management applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. The contents of the support CD a re subject to cha nge at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for updates. 6.5.1 Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the île ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the CD. 6.5.2 Drivers menu The Drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. The screen display and driver options vary under different operating system versions.
ASUS DSAN-DX 6-19 6.5.3 Management Software menu The Management Software menu displays the available network and server monitoring applications. Click an item to install. 6.5.4 Utilities menu The Utilities menu displays the software applications and utilities that the motherboard supports. Click an item to install. 6.5.5 Contact information Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. Y ou can also înd this information on the inside front cover of this user guide.
6-20 Chapter 6: Driver installation
A Reference information This appendix includes additional information that you may refer to when conîguring the motherboard.
Appendix summary A ASUS DSAN-DX A.1 DSAN-DX model block diagram .................................................. A-1
ASUS DSAN-DX A-1 A.1 DSAN-DX model block diagram 5100MCH (San Clemente) ICH9R 1333 FSB 667 x8 x8 x16 slot x8 slot x8 slot Z9s DDR2x3 x1 5721 x1 5721 x8 x8 x8 ASM 1410 DDR2x3 IT8213F PCI 33 PCI4 PCIE1 PCIE2 x8 slot x8 slot x4 x4 x4 ASM 1410 PCIE6 PCIE3 PIKE IDE 6 x SATA Xeon 5000/5100/5200/5300/5400 Intel MSM (RAID 0, 1, 10, 5) LSI MegaRAID (RAID 0, 1, 10) LSI MegaRAID (RAID 5 with iBTN)
A-2 Appendix A: Reference information